JP6864381B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In some conventional gaming machines, in order to make the player clearly recognize that the reach production has been developed, the development production is performed and then the reach production is performed (for example, the “fusuma production” in FIG. 14 of Patent Document 1 is performed. ").

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-121404

However, after the reach production is finished (for example, after notifying the loss and ending), no production is performed, so that some players cannot clearly recognize that the reach production is finished, and the game is enjoyed. It also contributed to the decline in the number of people.

In view of such circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to prevent a decrease in the interest in playing games.

In order to solve such a problem, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine including a main control means and an effect control means, and the main control means is advantageous to the player when the starting condition is satisfied. A determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game, and an identification information display control means for displaying the result of the determination by displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopping the display when the determination is made. A command transmitting means for transmitting a predetermined command is provided, and the effect control means can receive the predetermined command from the command transmitting means, changes the symbol corresponding to the identification information, and transmits the symbol. It is capable of performing variation effect of stopping, in the changing effect it is possible to execute a specific effect with music, after the notification of not to perform the special game by executing the specific effect, the identification It is possible to display a specific image before the information is stopped and displayed, and among the specific effects, the number of songs is different between the first specific effect and the second specific effect different from the first specific effect. Unlike the the case where the first running specific effect to display the specific image from Ri there is the case of displaying the specific image after executing the second specific effect, display of the specific image The period during which is performed is not accompanied by the above-mentioned music .

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

This is an example of a front view of a gaming machine. This is an example of a perspective view of a gaming machine with an open glass frame. This is an example of a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine. This is an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot determination table of a jackpot lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of the special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting data table at the end of a big hit game. It is a figure which shows an example of the special electric accessory operation mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big prize opening opening mode determination table for a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the table about a normal symbol and a startable movable piece. It is a figure which shows an example of various storage areas of a main RAM. It is a figure which shows the main process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol variation processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol stop processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game end processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the general control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the auxiliary game processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the main processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process (1) in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis processing (2) in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the jackpot notice effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice decision table before reach. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue pattern determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a step-up pattern determination table. (C) is a figure which shows an example of a roulette pattern determination table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a notice determination table during reach, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a character group pattern determination table, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a decorative member operation number determination table. is there. It is a figure which shows the main processing in a central control unit. (A) is a diagram showing a command reception interrupt process in the integrated control unit, and (b) is a diagram showing a V blank interrupt process in the integrated control unit. It is a figure which shows the animation pattern setting processing in a general control unit. FIG. 1 is a time chart 1 showing details for each variation effect pattern. This is animation 1 corresponding to the variable effect pattern. This is the animation 2 corresponding to the variable effect pattern. This is the animation 3 corresponding to the variable effect pattern. This is the animation 4 corresponding to the variable effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the music composition for each variation production pattern. FIG. 2 is a time chart 2 showing details for each variation effect pattern. FIG. 3 is a time chart 3 showing details for each variation effect pattern. FIG. 4 is a time chart 4 showing details for each variation effect pattern. FIG. 5 is a time chart 5 showing details for each variation effect pattern. 6 is a time chart 6 showing details for each variation effect pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of pseudo-reams and the appearance degree of the specific image, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the appearance degree of the specific image at the time of loss and the time of jackpot. This is the animation 5 corresponding to the variable effect pattern. This is an animation 6 corresponding to a variable effect pattern. This is an animation 7 corresponding to a variable effect pattern. This is the animation 8 corresponding to the variable effect pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of the effect symbol at the time of normal reach loss, and (b) is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of the effect symbol at the time of SP reach or more loss. This is an animation 9 corresponding to a variable effect pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of the effected symbols when the symbol fanning is successful, and (b) is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of the effected symbols when the symbol fanning fails. It is an animation 10 corresponding to a variation effect pattern. It is an animation 11 corresponding to a variation effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the operation promotion image which can be displayed for each variation effect pattern, and the execution timing. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship of the 1st operation promotion image and the 2nd operation promotion image of SP reach or more (at the time of loss). (A) is a diagram showing the selection ratio of the operation promotion image at the time of loss and jackpot (SP reach or higher) in the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state, and (b) is the diagram showing the selection ratio of the operation promotion image in the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state. It is a figure which shows the selection ratio of the 2nd operation promotion image at the time of loss in a state, and at the time of a big hit (SP reach or more). It is a figure which shows the vibration frequency and execution timing of the effect button for each variation effect pattern. FIG. 7 is a time chart 7 showing details for each variation effect pattern. It is an animation 12 corresponding to a variation effect pattern. FIG. 8 is a time chart 8 showing details for each variation effect pattern. It is an animation 13 corresponding to a variation effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the error-related command and priority. It is an animation 14 corresponding to a variation effect pattern. It is an animation 15 corresponding to a variation effect pattern. This is an animation 16 corresponding to a variable effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification of the vibration frequency and the execution timing of the effect button for each variation effect pattern.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine 1)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. Further, FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 in which the glass frame is opened according to the embodiment of the present invention. Further, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back surface side of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with an outer frame 60 attached to the island equipment of the game store, the outer frame 60, and a glass frame 50 rotatably supported (see FIGS. 1 and 2). Further, the outer frame 60 is provided with a game board 2 in which a game area 6 into which the game ball 200 flows down is formed.

The glass frame 50 includes an audio output device 32 composed of a speaker, a frame lighting device 34b having a plurality of lamps (LEDs), an effect button 35 for changing an effect mode by a pressing operation, and at least two directions (books). In the embodiment, a cross button 36 that can be pressed in four directions) is provided.

The audio output device 32 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like, and produces a sound effect. Further, the frame lighting device 34b is provided at a plurality of positions so as to produce an effect by lighting by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of the light of each lamp.

The effect button 35 is provided with an effect button detection switch 35a, and when the effect button detection switch 35a detects an operation of the player, further effect is executed in response to this operation. Similarly, the cross-shaped button 36 is also provided with a cross-shaped button detection switch 36b so that the player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1 (see FIG. 4). In particular, in the present embodiment, the effect button 35 is configured to be movable in the vertical direction by the effect button drive motor 35b (see FIG. 4). Further, the effect button 35 can be changed from the first mode (non-vibrating mode) to the second mode (vibrating mode) by the effect button drive motor 35b (not shown).

Further, the glass frame 50 is provided with an operation handle 3 for firing a game ball toward the game area 6 by being rotated, and a saucer 40 for storing a plurality of game balls. , The operation handle 3 has a downward slope so that the game ball flows down (see FIG. 2). A reception port for receiving a game ball is provided at the end of the downward slope of the saucer 40, and the game ball received by the reception port is driven by a ball feed solenoid 4b to form a glass frame 50. The game balls are sent out one by one to the ball feed opening 41 provided on the back surface.

Then, the game ball sent out to the ball feed opening 41 is guided to the end of the downward slope of the launch rail 42 by the launch rail 42 having a downward slope toward the launching member 4c. A stopper 43 for stopping the game ball is provided above the end of the downhill slope of the launch rail 42, and the game ball sent out from the ball feed opening 41 is the end of the downhill slope of the launch rail 42. One game ball will be stopped at the section (see FIG. 2).

Then, when the player touches the operation handle 3, the touch sensor 3a (see FIG. 4) provided inside the operation handle 3 detects that the operation handle 3 and the player are in contact with each other. After that, when the player rotates the operation handle 3, the launch volume 3b directly connected to the operation handle 3 also rotates, and the launch intensity of the game ball is adjusted by the launch volume 3b, and the launch ball is launched with the adjusted launch intensity. The launching member 4c directly connected to the solenoid 4a for rotation rotates. When the launching member 4c rotates, the launching member 4c launches the game ball 200 stored at the end of the downward inclination of the launch rail 42, and the game ball is launched into the game area 6.

The game ball launched as described above reaches the game area 6 when it rises from the launch rail 42 between the rails 5a and 5b and exceeds the ball return prevention piece 5c, and then freely falls in the game area 6. To do. At this time, the game ball will fall unpredictably due to the plurality of nails and windmills provided in the game area 6.

In the game area 6 of the game board 2, various winning openings (general winning opening 12, ordinary symbol gate 13, first starting opening 14, second starting opening 15, first large winning opening 16, second large winning opening) 17), an image display device 31, and a decorative member 7 are provided so as to surround the display area of the image display device 31.

Further, a start port lamp 14b is provided inside the first start port 14, and the start port lamp 14b, for example, changes the color of the hold icon described later when a game ball wins the first start port 14. When it is caused, it is possible to emit light in a color corresponding to the color of the hold icon. For example, when the game ball wins the first start port 14 and the hold icon is changed to the green hold icon, the start port lamp 14b can also emit green light.
The hold icon can be changed to blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors in addition to the normal color white, and the start port lamp 14b can also emit light in a color corresponding to these. ..

On the other hand, outside the game area 6 of the game board 2, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the ordinary symbol display device 22, and the first special symbol hold display 23 , A second special symbol holding display 24 and a normal symbol holding display 25 are provided.

At the lower left side of the game area 6, a game ball launched toward the left area of the game area 6 (so-called left-handed) can be won (winning), and is launched toward the right area of the game area 6. There are three general winning openings 12 in which a (so-called right-handed) game ball cannot be won, and a right-handed game ball can be won (winned) in the lower right part of the game area 6. Therefore, one general winning opening 12 is provided in which a left-handed game ball cannot be won.

Here, each general winning opening 12 is provided with a general winning opening detection switch 12a for detecting the winning (winning) of the game ball. Then, when the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 12 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out from the payout device for paying out the game ball. ..

In the lower center of the game area 6, a left-handed game ball can win a prize, and a right-handed game ball forms a starting area in which a right-handed game ball cannot win a prize. , And a second starting port 15 constituting a starting area in which a right-handed game ball can win (win) is provided side by side.

The second starting port 15 is a starting movable piece 15b constituting an ordinary electric accessory (starting port opening / closing device) for facilitating winning of a game ball into the second starting port 15, and a second starting port opening / closing solenoid. A closed state (closed mode) in which the starting movable piece 15b stands vertically and restricts the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 15 by the operation of the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 15c. , The start movable piece 15b is tilted and converted into an open state (opening mode) in which the game ball is allowed to win a prize in the second starting port 15. When the second starting port 15 is in the open state, the starting movable piece 15b functions as a saucer for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 15, so that the game ball to the second starting port 15 is compared to when the second starting port 15 is in the closed state. The chances of winning a prize (winning ratio) will increase.

Here, the first starting port 14 is provided with the first starting port detection switch 14a for detecting the winning (winning ball) of the game ball, and the second starting port 15 is provided with the winning (winning ball) of the game ball. ) Is provided, and a second start port detection switch 15a is provided. Then, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 14 and the second starting port 15 is detected, a random value for jackpot determination for performing the "big hit lottery (big hit determination)" described later is acquired.

Further, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 14 and the second starting port 15 is detected, in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot determination random number value, a special symbol determination random value for determining a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined. , The reach determination random number value for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the special symbol fluctuation random value are also acquired. The jackpot determination random value, the special symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the special figure variation random value are referred to as special symbol determination information. In addition, the fact that the special symbol is changed is called "variation display", and the fact that the change of the special symbol is stopped and stopped (displayed completely stopped without moving) is called "fixed stop display". Sometimes.

Further, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 14 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three game balls) are paid out from the payout device. Further, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 15 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one game ball) are paid out from the payout device. The number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins in the first starting port 14 may be the same as the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins in the second starting port 15.

On the left side and the right side of the game area 6, a normal symbol gate 13 forming a normal area through which the game ball can pass is provided.

Here, the normal symbol gate 13 is provided with a gate detection switch 13a for detecting the passage (entry) of the game ball. Then, when the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13 is detected, a hit determination random value for performing the "win lottery (hit determination)" described later is acquired.

Further, when the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol gate 13 is detected, in addition to the above-mentioned hit determination random value, the normal symbol determination random value for determining the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are displayed. The random value for fluctuation of the normal map for determination is also acquired. In addition, the random value for hit judgment, the random value for normal symbol judgment, and the random value for fluctuation of the normal figure are referred to as the normal figure judgment information.

In the area on the right side of the game area 6, the right-handed game ball can win (win), and the left-handed game ball cannot win the first prize opening 16 and the second prize. The mouths 17 are provided vertically separated (with a width that allows the game ball to pass).

The first large winning opening 16 opens and closes the first large winning opening that constitutes the first special electric accessory (first large winning opening opening / closing device) for facilitating the winning of the game ball into the first large winning opening 16. It has a door 16b and a first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c, and the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b stands substantially vertically by the operation of the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c. Closed state (closed mode) that regulates the winning of the game ball to the first prize opening, and open state (opening mode) that allows the game ball to win the first prize opening 16 by tilting the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b. It is converted to and controlled. When the first large winning opening 16 is in the open state, the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b functions as a saucer for guiding the game ball to the first large winning opening 16, so that the first large winning opening 16 is compared with the closed state. The chances of winning a game ball into the winning opening 16 (winning ratio) will increase.

Here, the first large winning opening 16a is provided with a first large winning opening detection switch 16a for detecting the winning (winning) of the game ball. Then, when the winning of the game ball to the first large winning opening 16 is detected, a preset number of prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second large winning opening 17 opens and closes the second large winning opening that constitutes the second special electric accessory (second large winning opening opening / closing device) for facilitating the winning of the game ball into the second large winning opening 17. It has a door 17b and a second prize opening opening / closing solenoid 17c, and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c causes the second winning opening opening / closing door 17b to stand substantially vertically and the second winning opening 17c. Closed state that regulates the winning of the game ball to the second prize opening (closed mode) and open state that allows the game ball to win the second prize opening 17b by tilting the door 17b (opening mode). It is converted to and controlled. When the 2nd big winning opening 17 is in the open state, the 2nd big winning opening opening / closing door 17b functions as a saucer for guiding the game ball to the 2nd big winning opening 17, so that the 2nd large winning opening 17 is compared with the closed state. The chances of winning a game ball to the winning opening 17 (winning ratio) will increase.

Here, the second large winning opening 17a is provided with a second large winning opening detection switch 17a for detecting the winning (winning) of the game ball. Then, when the winning of the game ball to the second large winning opening 17 is detected, a preset prize ball (for example, 15 game balls) is paid out. The number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins in the first large winning opening 16 may be different from the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins in the second large winning opening 17.

At the bottom of the game area 6, all of the general winning opening 12, the first starting opening 14, the second starting opening 15, the first major winning opening 16, and the second major winning opening 17 are won (balls). An out port 11 is provided for discharging the unplayed game ball out of the game area.

Further, in the center of the game area 6, an image display device 31 configured by an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or the like is provided. Two or more image display devices 31 may be provided.

The image display device 31 displays a customer waiting effect image during standby when the game is not performed, or displays a game effect image according to the progress of the game. Among them, three effect symbols 38 (left effect symbol 38a, middle effect symbol 38b, right effect symbol 38c) for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot in the variable effect described later are displayed in a variable manner, and the specific effect symbol 38 When the combination (for example, 777, etc.) is displayed as a fixed stop, the big hit is notified as a lottery result of the big hit, and the combination other than the specific effect symbol 38 (for example, 289, etc.) is displayed as a fixed stop, so that the big hit is displayed. Loss will be notified as a result of the lottery.

The effect symbol 38 starts the variable display in accordance with the start of the variable display of the special symbol executed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15. , The fixed stop display is performed according to the fixed stop display of the special symbol after the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time. That is, the timing of the variable display between the effect symbol 38 and the special symbol and the timing of the fixed stop display of the effect symbol 38 and the special symbol correspond to each other. It should be noted that the fact that the effect symbol 38 is changed is called "variation display", and the fact that the effect symbol 38 is stopped and displayed is called "fixed stop display". Further, in the effect symbol 38, a "temporary stop display" may be performed before the "fixed stop display", but the "temporary stop display" will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 43 (b) T1 to T2, the effect symbol 38 is composed of a character image as a first component and a number image as a second component. It is configured.
Further, the effect symbol 38 is a scene composed of a character image which is a first component and a numerical image which is a second component (for example, FIGS. 43 (c) T6 to T7) in the variable effect described later. ) And a scene (for example, FIGS. 43 (c) T4 to T5) composed of only a numerical image which is a second component.

Further, in the present embodiment, it varies regardless of whether the game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 14 or when the game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 15. In the effect, the effect symbol 38 of the same type is displayed in a variable manner and a fixed stop display. However, different types of effect symbols 38 are displayed in a variable manner and a fixed stop display when the game ball enters the first start port 14 and when the game ball enters the second start port 15. It may be configured as. It should be noted that the variable display (variable direction, variable mode) of the effect symbol 38, the effect performed together with the variable display (effect by display, effect by sound, effect by light emission) may be referred to as "variable effect".

Among the combinations of the specific effect symbols 38 for which the jackpot is notified, the combination of "777" is the combination in which the third jackpot is determined (the combination selected only at the time of the third jackpot) in FIG. 7, which will be described later. ..
On the other hand, among the combinations of the specific effect symbols 38 for which the jackpot is notified, the combination other than "777" (for example, "666") can be either the first jackpot or the third jackpot in FIG. 7, which will be described later. It is a combination that also has sex (a combination that is selected regardless of whether it is the first jackpot or the third jackpot).
That is, the "7 symbols" are symbols that suggest that a second special game (for example, a second jackpot) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game (for example, the first jackpot) is executed. However, other than the 7 symbols, for example, "6 symbols" can be said to be symbols that suggest that the first special game (for example, the first jackpot) is executed.

In addition to the 7 symbols, for example, when a combination of "6 symbols" is displayed and a jackpot is achieved, the jackpot game is low after the jackpot game is completed through a predetermined effect when the jackpot game is being performed. It is notified whether it will be in the probability game state or the high probability game state.

Further, on the lower right side of the display unit of the image display device 31, three small effect symbols 38d (see FIG. 43 and the like) for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot in the variation effect are in the vertical direction (upper in the present embodiment). It is displayed in a variable manner by scrolling from to below).

The variable display of the small effect symbol 38d is started in response to the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and corresponds to the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. And stop. That is, the small effect symbol 38d is variablely displayed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the first special symbol or the first special symbol or the small effect symbol 38d is changed depending on the variable state of the small effect symbol 38d. , The execution state of the variation display of the second special symbol is notified (suggested) to the player.

As with the effect symbol 38, the small effect symbol 38d is composed of, for example, symbols indicating numbers from "1" to "9". In the fixed stop display of the small effect symbol 38d, the small effect symbol is displayed. It is designed to stop for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (missing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same small effect symbols 38d such as "777" or a combination of small effect symbols 38d having regularity such as "357", and the loss mode is that. It is an aspect other than.
The small effect symbol 38d is a symbol having a smaller display size than the effect symbol 38. For example, the display size of the effect symbol 38 may change before reaching the SP reach and after reaching the SP reach, but even if the display size changes, the size of the effect symbol 38 is the same as that of the small effect symbol 38d. The relationship is immutable. That is, the small effect symbol 38d is always a symbol whose display size is smaller than that of the effect symbol 38.
The small effect symbol 38d may always be displayed in a size larger than that of the effect symbol 38, or the small effect symbol 38d may be displayed in a size larger than that of the effect symbol 38.

Further, in the display area of the image display device 31, among the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 14, the big hit lottery (big hit determination) has not been executed (undetermined). A special figure acquired based on the icon display of the first special symbol hold number (U1) indicating the number of figure judgment information so that the player can easily grasp it, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 15. Among the judgment information, the second special symbol hold number (U2) indicating the number of special symbol judgment information for which the big hit lottery (big hit judgment) has not been executed (undetermined) is displayed as an icon so that the player can easily grasp it. The hold icon display area 31b and the variable icon display area 31a for displaying the information indicating the special figure determination information during the variable display (variable effect) are displayed so that the player can easily grasp the information. (See FIG. 43, etc.).

Although the description is omitted in FIG. 43 and the like, when both the first special symbol hold number (U1) and the second special symbol hold number (U2) exist, one of the hold icons is set in the hold icon display area 31b. The parts are displayed overlapping. The hold icon display area 31b may be provided for the first special symbol hold number (U1) and for the second special symbol hold number (U2), respectively.

In the following description, the icon displayed in the hold icon display area 31b is referred to as "hold icon (special figure judgment information for which jackpot judgment has not been executed and corresponds to hold information)", and the variable icon display area 31a. The displayed icon is referred to as "the variable icon (special figure determination information for which the jackpot determination has been executed and the variation display (variation effect) is being executed, which corresponds to the execution information)".

The decorative member 7 surrounding the display area of the image display device 31 is provided with a wall portion erected from the game board 2 on the outer periphery thereof so that the game ball does not pass in front of the display area of the image display device 31. Has been done.

Further, on both the left and right sides of the decorative member 7, board lighting devices 34a having a plurality of lamps (LEDs and the like) are provided, and above the decorative member 7, the title (model name) of the gaming machine 1 is ". A first decorative member 33a (directing accessory) imitating a "signboard" is provided, and a second decorative member 33b (directing accessory) imitating a "sword" is provided on the right side of the decorative member 7.

The first decorative member 33a is driven by a panel drive device 33 composed of a solenoid, a motor, or the like, and can move in the vertical direction (operate from the initial position to the operating position) in the vertical direction. By moving, the image display device 31 can be moved to the front surface (operated from the initial position to the operating position). Similarly, the second decorative member 33b can also be driven by the panel drive device 33, tilt to the left with the lower portion of the second decorative member 33b as a fulcrum, and move to the front surface of the image display device 31. Further, the second decorative member 33b is composed of a sheath portion 33b1 imitating a sheath and a blade portion 33b2 housed in the sheath, and the blade portion is driven by a panel drive device 33 to move in the vertical direction ( It can operate from the initial position to the operating position).

A liquid crystal display may be provided on at least one of the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b, and the liquid crystal display may be provided with at least one of the hold icon display area and the variable icon display area. A hold icon display area may be provided on one of the liquid crystal display provided on the decorative member 33a and the liquid crystal display provided on the second decorative member 33b, and the variable icon display area may be provided on the other side.

The first special symbol display device 20 displays the lottery result (determination result) of the jackpot lottery (big hit determination) executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 14 over a predetermined time for the first special symbol. The first special symbol of the type corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as a fixed stop display after the variable display is performed, and is composed of a plurality of lighting members such as LEDs.

The second special symbol display device 21 displays the lottery result (determination result) of the jackpot lottery (big hit determination) executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 15 over a predetermined time. The second special symbol of the type corresponding to the lottery result is notified by confirming and stopping the display after the variable display, and is composed of a plurality of lighting members such as LEDs.

The first special symbol display device 20 and / or the second special symbol display device 21 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, if a big hit is won, "7" may be stopped and displayed, and if it is lost, "-" may be fixedly stopped and displayed.

Here, the "big hit lottery" means that when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15, a random value for jackpot determination is acquired, and the acquired jackpot determination is used. It refers to a process (big hit determination) of determining whether a random value is a random value corresponding to a "big hit".

Further, in the present embodiment, the "big hit" is a big hit game (big hit game) in the big hit lottery executed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball in the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15. It means that the player has acquired the right to perform a special game in favor of the player.

In the "big hit game", a round game in which the first big winning opening 16 (first special electric accessory) or the second big winning opening 17 (second special electric accessory) is opened is a special electric accessory. Is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times or 16 times) by operating the accessory continuous operation device for continuously operating the above.

A predetermined time is set for the maximum opening time (operating time of the special electric accessory) of the first large winning opening 16 or the second large winning opening 17 in each round game, and the first large winning opening is set during this time. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9 balls) are won (winned) in the winning opening 16 or the second large winning opening 17, one round game is completed. That is, the "big hit game" is a game in which a game ball wins (wins) in the first prize opening 16 or the second prize opening 17, and the player can acquire a prize ball corresponding to the winning ball. Is. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpot games are provided, which will be described in detail later.

In addition, even if a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15 during a variable display of a special symbol or during a big hit game (special game), the big hit lottery cannot be performed immediately. In that case, the right to the jackpot lottery is reserved under certain conditions.

More specifically, the special figure determination information acquired when the game ball wins (wins) in the first start port 14 is stored as the first hold up to four, and the game is stored in the second start port 15. The special figure determination information acquired when the ball wins (wins) is stored as the second hold, up to a maximum of four. The number of the first special symbol hold (U1), which is the number of the first hold, and the number of the second special symbol hold (U2), which is the number of the second hold, are the first special symbol hold indicator 23 and the second special, respectively. It is displayed on the symbol hold indicator 24.

When there is one first hold, the leftmost LED of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 lights up, and when there are two first holds, the leftmost end of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 is lit. Two LEDs light up. Further, when the first hold is three, the three LEDs from the leftmost end of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 blink and the right LED lights up, and when the first hold is four, the first Four LEDs are lit from the leftmost end of the special symbol hold indicator 23. Further, the second special symbol hold indicator 24 also displays the number of holds for the second hold in the same manner as described above.

Further, the normal symbol display device 22 provided outside the game area 6 of the game board 2 is a lottery result (determination) of a winning lottery (hit determination) performed when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13. The result) is notified by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner over a predetermined time and then stopping and displaying the normal symbol of the type corresponding to the lottery result, and is composed of a plurality of lighting members composed of LEDs and the like. Has been done.

Here, the "hit lottery" is a random value for hit determination when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, and the acquired random value for hit determination corresponds to "hit". It refers to the process of determining whether or not (hit determination).

Further, in the present embodiment, "hit" means that the player has acquired the right to execute an auxiliary game that is advantageous to the player in the winning lottery that is executed based on the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol gate 13. Say. In the "auxiliary game", the startable movable piece 15b of the second start port 15 is converted and controlled into an open state for a predetermined time. That is, the "auxiliary game" is a game in which a game ball wins (wins) a prize ball at the second starting port 15, and the player can acquire a prize ball corresponding to the prize. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games are provided, which will be described in detail later.

In addition, as with the special symbol, if the winning lottery cannot be performed immediately even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13 such as during the variable display of the normal symbol or during the auxiliary game, under certain conditions. The right to the winning lottery is reserved.

More specifically, the normal symbol determination information acquired when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13 is stored as the third hold, up to a maximum of four. The number of ordinary symbol hold indicators (G), which is the number of the third hold, is displayed on the ordinary symbol hold indicator 25 in the same manner as the first special symbol hold indicator 23 and the second special symbol hold indicator 24. Will be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the glass frame 50 supports a glass plate 52 that visually covers the game area 6 in front of the game board 2 (on the player side). The glass plate 52 is detachably fixed to the glass frame 50.

The glass frame 50 is connected to the outer frame 60 via the hinge mechanism 51 on one end side in the left-right direction (for example, on the left side facing the game machine 1), and is connected to the outer frame 60 with the hinge mechanism 51 as a fulcrum in the left-right direction. The other end side (for example, the right side facing the game machine 1) can be rotated in the direction of opening from the outer frame 60. The glass frame 50 covers the game board 2 together with the glass plate 52, and rotates like a door with the hinge mechanism portion 51 as a fulcrum, so that the inner portion of the outer frame 60 including the game board 2 can be opened.

On the other end side of the glass frame 50 in the left-right direction, a lock mechanism for fixing the other end side of the glass frame 50 to the outer frame 60 is provided. The lock mechanism can be unlocked with a special key. Further, the glass frame 50 is also provided with a door opening switch 133 for detecting whether or not the glass frame 50 is opened from the outer frame 60.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 110, an effect control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power supply board 140, a game information output terminal board 30, and the like are provided on the back surface of the game machine 1. Further, the power supply board 140 is provided with a power plug 141 for supplying electric power to the gaming machine 1 and a power switch (not shown).

(Overall block diagram of gaming machine 1)
Next, a control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described with reference to the entire block diagram of the game machine 1 of FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1.

The main control board 110 controls the basic operation (progress) of the game, inputs various detection signals such as the first start port detection switch 14a, and inputs the first special symbol display device 20 and the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c. Etc. are driven to control the game.

The main control board 110 is connected to the effect control board 120, the payout control board 130, and the power supply board 140. The communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120 is configured so that data can be communicated in only one direction from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120, and the main control board 110 and the payout control board 130 communicate with each other. Communication is configured so that data can be communicated in both directions. Further, the main control board 110 inputs the power supply voltage from the power supply board 140.

Further, the main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores various data and tables required for game control programs and game control, and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing. It includes at least a built-in one-chip microcomputer 110m, an input port and an output port (not shown) for main control, and a RAM clear switch 111a.

The input port for the main control includes a payout control board 130, a general winning opening detection switch 12a for detecting that a game ball has entered the general winning opening 12, and a detection that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 13. The gate detection switch 13a, the first start port detection switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has entered the first start port 14, and the second start port for detecting that the game ball has entered the second start port 15. The detection switch 15a, the first large winning opening detection switch 16a that detects that a game ball has entered the first large winning opening 16, and the second large that detects that a game ball has entered the second large winning opening 17. A winning opening detection switch 17a and a RAM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c are connected. Various signals are input to the main control board 110 by the input port for main control.

Further, the output ports for the main control include the effect control board 120, the payout control board 130, the second start port opening / closing solenoid 15c for opening / closing the starting movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15, and the first winning opening opening / closing door. The first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c that operates 16b, the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c that operates the second winning opening opening / closing door 17b, the first special symbol display device 20 that displays a special symbol, and the second special symbol Display device 21, normal symbol display device 22 for displaying normal symbols, first special symbol hold display 23 and second special symbol hold display 24 for displaying the number of hold of special symbols, and normal for displaying the number of hold for normal symbols The symbol hold display 25, the round number display 66 that displays the corresponding number of rounds when a plurality of types of rounds are provided, toward the right area of the game area 6 in the time-saving gaming state or the high-probability gaming state. A right-handed display 67 for notifying the firing, a game information output terminal board 30 for outputting an external information signal, and the like are connected. Various signals are output by this output port for main control.

Based on the input signals from each detection switch and timer, the main CPU 110a reads the program stored in the main ROM 110b and performs arithmetic processing, directly controls each device and display, or produces the result of arithmetic processing. Send commands to other boards accordingly.

In addition to the game control program, the main ROM 110b includes a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 5) used for the jackpot lottery, a special symbol determination table for determining a special symbol to be confirmed and stopped (see FIG. 6), and a jackpot. Big hit game end setting data table for determining the game state after the end (see Fig. 7), special electric accessory operation mode determination table for determining the opening / closing conditions of the big prize opening opening / closing door (see Fig. 8), big prize The mouth opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9), the special figure variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol (see FIG. 10), the hit determination table referred to in the winning lottery (see FIG. 11), etc. are stored. There is. It should be noted that the above-mentioned table is merely a list of characteristic tables among the tables in the present embodiment as an example, and many other tables and programs (not shown) are provided in the progress of the game. ing.

In the main RAM 110c, a special figure special electric processing data storage area, a general figure general electric processing data storage area, a normal symbol holding number (G) storage area, a normal symbol holding storage area, a stopped normal symbol data storage area, and a first special symbol holding Number (U1) storage area, 2nd special symbol hold number (U2) storage area, 1st jackpot determination random value storage area, 2nd jackpot determination random value storage area, round game count (R) storage area, open count (K) Storage area, large winning opening winning ball counter (C) storage area, second starting opening winning ball counter (D), start opening count counter, high probability game flag storage area, time saving game flag storage area, high probability game Number of times (X) storage area, time saving game number of times (J) storage area, game state buffer, stop special figure data storage area, stop normal figure data storage area, transmission data storage area for production, special symbol time counter, special game timer counter , Auxiliary game timer counters and various other timer counters are provided. The above-mentioned storage area is only an example, and many other storage areas are provided.

The game information output terminal board 30 is a board for outputting an external information signal generated by the main control board 110 and the payout control board 130 to a hall computer or the like of a game store. The game information output terminal board 30 is connected to the main control board 110 by wiring, and is provided with a plurality of connectors (terminals) for connecting external information to a hall computer or the like of a game store.

The effect control board 120 is a sub-control board (sub-control means) that controls the effect (performed by the game machine 1) related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 120 includes a sub CPU 120a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 120b that stores an effect control program, an effect control unit 120 m that includes a sub RAM 120c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image display device 31, and an audio output device. A display / voice control unit 150 that controls 32 (speakers) and the like, a lamp / drive control unit 160 that controls a panel lighting device 34a, a frame lighting device 34b, a panel drive device 33, an effect button drive motor 35b, and the like. It is equipped with an input port and an output port for production control.

The sub CPU 120a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the game program stored in the sub ROM 120b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the production while utilizing the sub RAM 120c as a work area, thereby receiving a command received from the main control board 110. In response to the input signals from the effect button detection switch 35a and the cross button detection switch 36b, various control units (display / voice control unit 150, lamp / drive control unit 160) are controlled to execute various effects ( Output data and commands).

Further, when the sub CPU 120a receives the variation pattern designation command indicating the variation mode of the special symbol from the main control board 110, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the contents of the received variation pattern designation command, and analyzes the contents of the received variation pattern designation command, and the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the panel The effect data (such as an effect pattern designation command described later) for causing the drive device 33, the panel lighting device 34a, the frame lighting device 34b, and the effect button drive motor 35b to execute a predetermined effect is determined. Then, the determined effect data is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 150 and the lamp / drive control unit 160 to perform control for executing the variation effect.

In the sub ROM 120b, in addition to the program for controlling the effect, a variable effect pattern determination table for determining the variable effect pattern for executing the variable effect is stored in the sub ROM 120b. It should be noted that the above-mentioned table is merely a list of characteristic tables among the tables in the present embodiment as an example, and many other tables and programs (not shown) are provided in the progress of the game. ing.

The sub RAM 120c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 120a, and has a plurality of storage areas.

An effect button detection switch 35a, a cross button detection switch 36b, and the like are connected to the input port of the effect control board 120. In the effect control board 120, an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 35 has been operated is input from the effect button detection switch 35a, or a cross button detection indicating that the cross button 36 has been operated from the cross button detection switch 36b is detected. When a signal (upper button detection signal, left button detection signal, lower button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing is performed to execute an effect according to the detection signal.

Here, by operating the up and down buttons of the cross button 36, it is possible to perform "volume adjustment" for adjusting the volume of the BGM output from the voice output device 32, the volume of the SE, and the like. For example, the volume value can be adjusted in a range of 5 steps, and one of the lowest volume value "1" and the stepwise highest volume value "5" can be set. .. Further, the volume value is gradually increased by operating the upper button, and the volume value is gradually decreased by operating the lower button.

Further, by operating the left and right buttons of the cross button 36, it is possible to perform "light amount adjustment" for adjusting the light emission amount of various LEDs of the panel lighting device 34a and the frame lighting device 34b and the light emission amount of the backlight of the image display device 31. It has become. For example, the light intensity value can be adjusted in a range of 5 steps, and any one from "1", which has the smallest light intensity value, to "5", which has the largest light intensity value in steps, can be set. .. Further, the light intensity value is gradually increased by operating the right button, and the light intensity value is decreased stepwise by operating the left button.

The display / sound control unit 150 receives a command from the effect control unit 120m and controls the image display device 31 to display a predetermined image, or controls the sound output device 32 to output a predetermined sound. To do.

The display / audio control unit 150 includes a centralized CPU 152 that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 153 that stores an integrated control program, an integrated control unit 151 that has an integrated RAM 154 that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a VDP as an image processor ( An image control unit 155 composed of a Video Display Processor), a CGROM 156 in which image data and the like are stored, and a frame buffer and the like provided inside the image control unit 155 and temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. It includes a VRAM 157, a voice control unit 158 as a voice processor, a voice ROM 159 in which voice data and the like are stored, an input / output port and the like.

The control CPU 152 receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the display control program stored in the control ROM 153, performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the control RAM 154 as a work area, and receives the message from the effect control unit 120 m. The image control unit 155 and the voice control unit 158 are controlled to execute various effects (data and commands are output) in response to the effect instruction command and the like.

The general ROM 153 is composed of a mask ROM or the like, and displays a display control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of drawing control commands, and an animation of an effect pattern. The animation pattern, animation scene information, etc. for this are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes a specific content of an effect by an image, and the animation pattern is associated with animation scene information, a display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method. , Various information such as a duty ratio which is a parameter of the brightness of the image display device 31 is included.

The image control unit 155 is connected to a CGROM 156 that stores various image data, and is connected to commands (display list, drawing command, etc.) from the general control unit 151 (general CPU 152) and image data stored in the CGROM 156. Based on this, drawing data that is the source of a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated. The image data is material data representing an image (frame) to be displayed on the image display device 31, for example, an effect symbol image, a background image constituting the background of the effect symbol, a character image, and a dialogue image. Is. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

The CGROM 156 is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. The CGROM 156 is read out in image data units by the image control unit 155, and image processing is performed in image data units of this frame.

Further, the CGROM 156 stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression. The CGROM 156 may be configured to compress only a part of the image data without compressing all the image data. Further, as the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 157 is composed of an SRAM having a high speed of writing or reading image data. The VRAM 157 has a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the integrated control unit 151 (integrated CPU 152), a frame buffer area corresponding to the image display device 31, and the like.

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" at each start of drawing.

Therefore, the image control unit 155 draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 156 in the "drawing frame buffer" of the frame buffer area of the VRAM 157 based on the instruction (display list) from the general control unit 151 (general CPU 152). , Reads drawing data from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, generates a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) based on the read drawing data, and outputs it to the image display device 31 to display various images. ..

An operation clock is supplied to the image control unit 155 from the crystal oscillator, and by dividing the operation clock, a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 31 is achieved. ) Is generated and output to the image display device 31. In the present embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 155 is 30 fps (1/30 second = about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second, but per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second = about 16.6 ms) so that drawing (displaying an image) 60 times is performed.

Further, a general-purpose board 39 that converts image data into a predetermined image format and outputs the image data is connected between the image control unit 155 and the image display device 31. The general-purpose board 39 has a bridge function for converting into an image format corresponding to the performance of the image display device 31 that displays image data. For example, a 19-inch liquid crystal display device of SXGA (1280 dots x 1080 dots) can be used. It absorbs the difference in resolution between when it is connected and when a 17-inch LCD display device of XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) is connected.

The voice control unit 158 is connected to the voice output device 32, and based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 120 m, audio data and music data are matched to the display of the image display device 31. (BGM, SE) and the like are controlled to be output from the audio output device 32.

The lamp / drive control unit 160 includes a lamp CPU 160a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 160b that stores a lamp / drive control program, a lamp RAM 160c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 160a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp / drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 160b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 160c as a work area. In response to the received effect instruction command or the like, the controlled device such as various lighting devices or various drive devices is controlled to perform a predetermined effect (data and commands are output).

A panel lighting device 34a, a frame lighting device 34b, a panel drive device 33, and an effect button drive motor 35b are connected to the input / output ports of the lamp / drive control unit, from the effect control unit 120 m (sub CPU 120a). Based on the various effect data (including commands) transmitted, lighting control of various LEDs of the panel lighting device 34a and the frame lighting device 34b is performed to perform light emission effect, etc., and the panel drive device 33, effect. By controlling the drive of a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the button drive motor 35b, an operation effect (the above-mentioned movement effect) or the like is performed.

The payout control board 130 includes a payout control unit 131 that controls payout of the game ball and a launch control unit 132 that controls the launch of the game ball.

The payout control board 130 is connected to the main control board 110 and the power supply board 140, and as described above, the communication between the payout control board 130 and the main control board 110 is configured so that data can be communicated in both directions. The payout control board 130 inputs the power supply voltage from the power supply board 140.

The payout control unit 131 is composed of a one-chip microcomputer composed of a payout CPU 131a, a payout ROM 131b, and a payout RAM 131c.

The payout CPU 131a reads the program stored in the payout ROM 131b and performs arithmetic processing based on the payout ball count detection switch 135 for detecting whether or not the game ball has been paid out, the door open switch 133, and the input signal from the timer. At the same time, the corresponding payout data is transmitted to the main control board 110 based on the process.

Further, a payout motor 134 of a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from a storage portion of the game balls is connected to the output side of the payout control board 130. The payout CPU 131a reads a predetermined program from the payout ROM 131b and performs arithmetic processing based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, and controls the payout motor 134 of the payout device to play a predetermined game ball. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 131c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the payout CPU 131a.

In the launch control unit 132, the touch sensor 3a and the launch volume 3b are connected to the input side, and the launch solenoid 4a and the ball feed solenoid 4b are connected to the output side. The firing control unit 132 inputs a touch signal from the touch sensor 3a and controls the firing solenoid 4a and the ball feed solenoid 4b to be energized based on the voltage supplied from the firing volume 3b.

The touch sensor 3a is provided inside the operation handle 3, and is composed of a capacitance type proximity switch that utilizes a change in capacitance when the player touches the operation handle 3. When the touch sensor 3a detects that the player has touched the operation handle 3, the touch sensor 3a outputs a touch signal permitting the firing solenoid 4a to be energized to the firing control unit 132. As a major premise, the launch control unit 132 is configured so that the game ball 200 is not launched into the game area 6 unless a touch signal is input from the touch sensor 3a.

The firing volume 3b is provided directly connected to a rotating portion in which the operation handle 3 rotates, and is composed of a variable resistor. The firing volume 3b divides the constant voltage (for example, 5V) applied to the firing volume 3b by a variable resistor and supplies the divided voltage to the firing control unit 132 (the voltage supplied to the firing control unit 132). Variable). The launch control unit 132 plays the game ball 200 by energizing the launch solenoid 4a based on the voltage divided by the launch volume 3b and rotating the launch member 4c directly connected to the launch solenoid 4a. Fire in area 6.

The launching solenoid 4a is composed of a rotary solenoid, and a launching member 4c is directly connected to the launching solenoid 4a. When the launching solenoid 4a rotates, the launching member 4c is rotated.

Here, the rotation speed of the firing solenoid 4a is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 132. As a result, the number of firing games in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute) because one is fired for each rotation of the firing solenoid. That is, one game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

The ball feed solenoid 4b is composed of a straight-moving solenoid, and feeds the game balls in the saucer 40 one by one toward the launching member 4c directly connected to the launch solenoid 4a.

The power supply board 140 includes a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine 1, monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, The power failure detection signal is output to the main control board 110. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal reaches a high level, the main CPU 110a is in an operable state, and when the power failure detection signal becomes a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stopped state. The backup power supply is not limited to the capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, or the capacitor and the battery may be used in combination.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, the state relating to the jackpot lottery has a "low probability gaming state" and the "high probability gaming state", and the state relating to the starting movable piece 15b possessed by the second starting port 15 is a "non-time saving gaming state". It has a "time saving game state". The state related to the jackpot lottery (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state) and the state related to the startable movable piece 15b (non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state) can be related to each other or can be made independent. it can. In other words
(1) The "low-probability time-saving game state", which is a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state,
(2) "Low-probability non-time-saving game state", which is a low-probability game state and non-time-saving game state,
(3) "High-probability time-saving game state", which is a high-probability game state and time-saving game state,
(4) It is possible to provide a "high-probability non-time-saving game state" which is a high-probability non-time-saving game state and a non-time-saving game state.
The game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the game machine 1, is set to the "low probability non-time saving game state", and this game state is set to the "normal game state" in the present embodiment. I will call it. Further, the "low-probability time-saving game state" will be referred to as the "time-saving game state" in the present embodiment. Further, the "high-probability time-saving gaming state" will be referred to as the "high-probability gaming state" in the present embodiment. In addition, the "normal game state" and the "time saving game state" may be collectively referred to as a "low probability game state".

In the present embodiment, the "low probability gaming state" means that the jackpot winning probability is the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot lottery performed on the condition that the game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15. For example, it refers to a gaming state set as low as 1/300. On the other hand, the "high probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared with the low probability gaming state, and the jackpot winning probability is set as high as, for example, 1/60. Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state". The change from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is performed after the jackpot game, which will be described later, is completed.

In the present embodiment, the "non-time saving game state" means that in the winning lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is "time saving game". A gaming state that is set longer than the "state" and that the opening time of the second starting port 15 when a winner is won is short and easy to set. For example, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, a winning lottery is performed and the normal symbol display device 22 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, but the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, for example, 30 seconds after the start of the variable display. It will be stopped and displayed later. Then, when the lottery result is successful, the second starting port 15 is controlled in the open mode for 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the "time saving game state" means that in the winning lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is "non-time saving game". It refers to a gaming state that is set shorter than the "state" and that the opening time of the second starting port 15 when a winner is won is, for example, 3 seconds, which is longer than the "non-time saving gaming state". Further, in the "non-time saving game state", the probability of winning in the winning lottery is set as low as 1/16, and in the "time saving game state", the probability of winning in the winning lottery is as high as 15/16, for example. Set. Therefore, in the "time-saving game state", when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, the second starting port 15 is more likely to be controlled in the open state than in the "non-time-saving game state". As a result, in the "short-time game state", the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the consumption of the game ball.

In the embodiment, the "time-saving game state" has more advantages than the "non-time-saving game state" in terms of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 15, and the winning probability of the winning lottery. It is set. However, the "time saving game state" may be set so that only one of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 15, and the winning probability of the winning lottery is advantageous.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 12.

(Big hit judgment table of big hit lottery)
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table. Specifically, FIG. 5A is a jackpot determination table for a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 14, and FIG. 5B is a jackpot determination table for the second starting port 15. It is a jackpot judgment table of a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball. In the tables of FIGS. 5 (a) and 5 (b), the jackpot probabilities are the same.

As shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, the jackpot determination table is associated with the probability game state, the jackpot determination random value, and the jackpot determination result.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table of the jackpot lottery shown in FIGS. 5 (a) and 5 (b), and is a "big hit" based on the current probability game state and the acquired random number value for jackpot determination. It is judged whether it is "missing" or "missing".

For example, according to the jackpot determination table of the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. 5A, two jackpot determination random numbers "7" and "8" are determined to be jackpots in the low probability gaming state. On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, 10 jackpot determination random numbers from "7" to "16" are determined to be jackpots. If the value is a random number other than the above, it is determined to be "missing".

Therefore, since the random number range of the random number value for jackpot determination is 0 to 599, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the low probability gaming state is 1/300, and it is determined to be a jackpot in the high probability gaming state. The probability is increased by 5 times to 1/60.

(Special symbol determination table)
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for determining the type of special symbol to be fixedly stopped and displayed as a result of variable display. Specifically, FIG. 6A is a special symbol determination table for loss, and FIG. 6B is a special symbol determination table for jackpots.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the special symbol determination table in the loss is acquired when the type of the special symbol display device and the game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15. The special symbol determination random value and the lost special symbol (stop special symbol data) are associated with each other. In addition, a plurality of lost special symbols and a random value for determining a special symbol may be associated with each other so that a plurality of special symbols can be determined even in the case of loss.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, in the special symbol determination table in the jackpot, the type of the special symbol display device (type of the starting port in which the game ball wins), the first starting opening 14, or the second starting The special symbol determination random value acquired when the game ball enters the mouth 15 is associated with the jackpot special symbol (stop special symbol data).

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 6 and determines the type of special symbol (stop special symbol data) based on the type of the special symbol display device, the random value for determining the special symbol, and the like.

Then, at the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect symbol designation command as the information of the special symbol is determined based on the determined type of the special symbol (stop special symbol data). Here, in the effect symbol specification command, one command is composed of two bytes of data, one byte of MODE data for identifying the classification of the control command, and one byte of DATA indicating the content of the control command to be executed. It consists of data. This also applies to the fluctuation pattern specification command and the like, which will be described later.

Here, as will be described later, the type of the special symbol (stop special diagram data) determines the game state after the end of the jackpot game (see FIG. 7) and the type of the jackpot game (see FIG. 8). , It can be said that the type of the special symbol determines the game state and the type of the jackpot game after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, in the column of the special symbol in FIG. 6B, the explanation corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is supplementarily described.

(Setting data table at the end of the jackpot game)
FIG. 7 is a data table set at the end of the jackpot game for determining the game state after the jackpot game ends.

As shown in FIG. 7, in the jackpot game end setting data table, the stop special figure data of the special symbol, the game state buffer, the time-saving game state, the time-saving game count (J), the probability game state, and the high probability The number of games (X) is associated with it.

Here, the "game state buffer" is information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The gaming state is composed of a combination of a time-saving gaming state (or non-time-saving gaming state) and a high-probability gaming state (or low-probability gaming state).

Specifically, if the game state buffer is "00H", the game state information of the low-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state in which both the time-saving game flag and the high-probability game flag are not set (that is, the normal game state). ) Is shown. If the game state buffer is "01H", the time-saving game flag is not set, but the high-probability game flag is set to indicate the game state information of the high-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state. When the game state buffer is "02H", it indicates the game state information (that is, the time-saving game state) of the low-probability game state and the time-saving game state in which the time-saving game flag is set but the high-probability game flag is not set. .. When the game state buffer is "03H", it indicates the game state information (that is, the high-probability game state) of the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state in which both the time-saving game flag and the high-probability game flag are set. In the game machine specifications (specs) of the present embodiment, the game state buffer does not become "01H", but in the game machine specifications (specs), although it is in a high-probability gaming state, it is visually notified. If the specification is provided with a so-called "latent probability change", the game state buffer may be "01H".

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot game end time setting data table shown in FIG. 7, and based on the stop special figure data of the special symbol and the game state buffer, the time-saving game state, the time-saving game count (J), and the probability. The game state and the number of high-probability games (X) are determined.

As a feature of the jackpot game end setting data table shown in FIG. 7 in the present embodiment, the "first jackpot" is given 100 times as the number of time-saving games (J) and 0 times as the number of high-probability games (X). Is given, the "second jackpot" is given 10,000 times as the number of time-saving games (J), the high-probability game number (X) is given 10,000 times, and the "third big hit" is given the number of time-saving games (J). ) Is given 10,000 times, and the high probability number of games (X) is given 10,000 times. Further, the "first jackpot" is given a low-probability gaming state, and the "second jackpot" and the "third jackpot" are given a high-probability gaming state.

(Special electric accessory operation mode determination table)
FIG. 8 is a special electric accessory operation mode determination table for determining the grand prize opening opening mode table. As will be described later, since the jackpot game is executed based on this jackpot opening mode table, it can be said that the jackpot opening mode table indicates the type of the jackpot game. In addition, in this embodiment, "table" is abbreviated as appropriate and is described as "TBL".

As shown in FIG. 8, in the special electric accessory operation mode determination table, the stop special figure data of the special symbol and the large winning opening opening mode table are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a will refer to the special electric accessory operation mode determination table shown in FIG. 8 and determine the special winning opening opening mode table based on the stop special figure data of the special symbol.

(Large winning opening opening mode table)
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the configuration of the large winning opening opening mode table determined in FIG. 8, depending on the large winning opening opening mode table, the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b or the second large winning opening opening / closing door 17b. Opening and closing conditions are determined.

Specifically, it is a group of big hit opening opening mode determination tables for big hits, which is referred to in a big hit game, and is composed of a first big hit table, a second big hit table, and a third big hit table.

In the large winning opening opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 9, the type of large winning opening to be opened (first large winning opening 16 or second large winning opening 17) and the maximum number of round games in one big hit game are displayed. And the specified number that indicates the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening in one round, the opening time from the start of the big hit game to the execution of the first round game, and the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening in each round game , One opening time of the big winning opening in each round game, one closing time of the big winning opening in each round game, the interval time until the next round game is executed, and the end of the last round game The ending time from to the end of the jackpot game is associated.

The main CPU 110a executes the first jackpot game based on the first jackpot TBL, executes the second jackpot game based on the second jackpot TBL, and executes the third jackpot game based on the third jackpot TBL. Become.

According to the first big hit TBL shown in FIG. 9, the first big winning opening opening / closing door 16b is operated to open the first big winning opening 16 on the right side of the game area 6 for up to 29 seconds per round. The first jackpot game can be executed. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls win the first large winning opening 16 by the time when the opening time has passed 29 seconds, the game of one round is completed. Then, when the 16-round game is completed, the first jackpot game is completed.

According to the second big hit TBL shown in FIG. 9, the first big winning opening opening / closing door 16b is operated to open the first big winning opening 16 on the right side of the game area 6 for a maximum of 1 for 2 rounds (2 times). It is possible to perform a second jackpot game in which the door is opened for 8.8 seconds. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls win the first large winning opening 16 by the time when the opening time elapses 1.8 seconds, one round of games will be completed. Then, when the two-round game is completed, the second jackpot game is completed.

According to the third big hit TBL shown in FIG. 9, the second big winning opening opening / closing door 17b is operated to open the second big winning opening 17 on the right side of the game area 6 for up to 29 seconds per round. The third big hit game can be executed. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls win the second major winning opening 17 by the time when the opening time has passed 29 seconds, one round of games will be completed. Then, when the 16-round game is completed, the third big hit game is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, three types of "big hit games (special games)" are provided, from the first big hit game to the third big hit game, in which the opening operation of the big winning opening and the opening operation of the big winning opening are different. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with various special games.

Further, the opening time of the second jackpot game (1.8 seconds) is shorter than the opening time of the first jackpot game (29 seconds) and the opening time of the third jackpot game (29 seconds), for example. Therefore, it can be said that it is a "disadvantageous opening mode".

(Special figure fluctuation pattern determination table)
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a special figure variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern (variation time, etc.) of a special symbol as will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table, a special symbol display device (type of start port), a jackpot determination result, a special symbol (stop special symbol data), a random value for reach determination, and a special symbol are displayed. (U1 or U2), the random value for special symbol variation, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol are associated with each other.

Therefore, it can be said that the "variation pattern of the special symbol" determines at least the determination result of the jackpot and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Further, since the reach is always performed at the time of a big hit, the reach determination random value is not referred to at the time of a big hit. The reach determination random number value has a random number range set to 97 (0 to 96), and the special figure variation random number value has a random number range set to 100 (0 to 99).

Further, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10, the variation pattern (1) (normal variation) so that the average variation time of the special symbol becomes shorter as the number of reserved special symbols (U1 or U2) increases. ), The fluctuation time (T2) of the fluctuation pattern (2) (shortening fluctuation) is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time (T1). The maximum number of balls "4" may be stored as the number of reserved special symbols, but the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined after subtracting 1 from the number of reserved special symbols. Therefore, "4" is not referred to as the number of reservations. In the following, "normal fluctuation 1" and "normal fluctuation 2" may be collectively referred to as "normal fluctuation".

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10, and refers to a special symbol display device (type of starting port), a lottery result of a jackpot lottery, a special symbol to be stopped, and a special symbol hold number (U1 or U2). ), The variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation time of the special symbol are determined based on the reach determination random value and the special symbol variation random value.

Then, based on the determined variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation pattern designation command of the special symbol is generated, and the information of the variation pattern of the special symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 120.

Here, the variation pattern designation command of the special symbol is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the classification of the command and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In the present embodiment, when the MODE data is "E6H", a command for specifying a variation pattern of the special symbol of the first special symbol display device 20 corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 14 is shown, and the MODE data is used as the MODE data. When it is "E7H", a command for designating a variation pattern of the special symbol of the second special symbol display device 21 corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 15 is shown.

Further, in the effect control board 120, as will be described later, the effect content such as the effect symbol 38 is determined based on the variation pattern (variation pattern designation command) of the special symbol. In the rightmost column of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10, the effect contents such as the effect symbol 38 are described for reference.

Here, as the production contents, "normal fluctuation 1", "normal fluctuation 2", and "shortening fluctuation" mean that a plurality of production symbols 38 fluctuate apart at high speed and stop without reaching. The difference between the normal fluctuation 1 and the normal fluctuation 2 and the shortened fluctuation is that the shortened fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation 1 and the normal fluctuation 2.

Further, "reach" is a variation that gives the player a sense of expectation of a jackpot, such that a part of the combination of the effect symbols 38 that notifies the jackpot is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the other effect symbols 38 fluctuate. Means an aspect. For example, when a combination of three-digit effect symbols 38 of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 38 for notifying a jackpot, two effect symbols 38 are temporarily stopped and displayed at "7", and the rest. A mode in which the effect symbol 38 is fluctuating. The "temporary stop display (temporary stop)" means that the effect symbol 38 sways slightly or the effect symbol 38 is slightly deformed to make the player appear as if the effect symbol 38 is stopped. Aspect.

Further, "normal reach" means a reach with a low expectation (hereinafter referred to as "big hit expectation") in which a jackpot game in which two effect symbols 38 are temporarily stopped and the remaining one effect symbol 38 fluctuates is executed. doing. In the present embodiment, the "normal reach" does not cause a big hit, but the "normal reach" may be used to make a big hit. In addition, "SP reach" means super reach, which has a higher expectation of big hit than normal reach. For example, it refers to a mode in which a special character is displayed due to a special change in the effect symbol 38 that has not been temporarily stopped, a change in the effect symbol 38, or a change in the background image. In addition, "SPSP reach" means a special reach that is performed after the super reach and has a higher expectation of a big hit than the super reach. Also in the "SPSP reach", the effect symbol 38 changes, the background image changes, and a special character is displayed, for example, a live-action image is displayed. Further, the "full rotation reach" means a mode in which the combination of a plurality of effect symbols 38 for notifying the jackpot changes at a low speed in a state where all the combinations are aligned, and in the present embodiment, only when the jackpot lottery is won. It means reach to be executed. In addition, "SP reach" or "SPSP reach" may be referred to as "SP reach or higher".

It should be noted that the effect symbol 38 in "SP reach" and "SPSP reach" changes, for example, until "SP reach" and "SPSP reach", the effect symbol 38 is composed of numbers + characters. However, after reaching "SP reach" or "SPSP reach", when the production symbol 38 changes to only numbers, or when the production symbol 38 changes to only numbers, "SP reach" or "SPSP" It corresponds that the display size is smaller (changes smaller) than the display size of the effect symbol 38 up to the "reach".

As described above, the effect symbol 38 has a scene composed of numbers + characters and a scene composed of only numbers in the variable effect. For example, as shown in FIGS. 43 (c) T4 to T5, in the configuration of only numbers, as shown in FIGS. 43 (c) T6 to T7, the decorativeness of the effect symbol 38 itself is higher than that of the configuration of numbers + characters. It can be said that the effect design 38 itself is highly decorative in the composition of numbers and characters.
That is, in a scene where attention is paid to whether or not the reach effect is executed, it is highly likely that the player is also paying attention to whether or not the reach effect is performed, that is, the effect symbol 38, so that the effect symbol is highly decorative. By using 38, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. On the other hand, in a scene where attention is paid to whether or not a jackpot is achieved in "SP reach" or the like, there is a high possibility that the player is also paying close attention to the character image or the like rather than the production symbol 38. By using the effect symbol 38 having low decorativeness, it is possible to prevent the effect symbol 38 from being overly gazed at, and it is possible to gaze at the character image or the like.

In addition, the "pseudo-continuous notice" means the "number of times the pseudo-continuous notice is executed", and the "pseudo-continuous notice" is produced during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to one big hit lottery. It means a notice by a variation mode in which the symbol 38 is temporarily stopped and then changed again to perform the variation and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 38 a plurality of times. The number in parentheses in the pseudo-ream number column indicates the number of fluctuation displays that are apparently executed when the pseudo-ream is executed. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern 17, the pseudo-ream is 3. By performing this time, it is apparently shown that the variation display is executed four times (pseudo-four variation).

Further, in suggesting the execution of the "pseudo-continuous notice", only the effect symbol 38 may be used, or the dedicated "pseudo-continuous execution suggestion symbol" may be used.
For example, when suggesting the execution of the "pseudo continuous notice" using only the effect symbol 38, even if different odd-numbered effect symbols 38 are combined and temporarily stopped and displayed to suggest the execution of the "pseudo continuous notice". Alternatively, for example, the left effect symbol 38a is temporarily stopped and displayed with 5 symbols, the middle effect symbol 38b is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the right effect symbol 38c is temporarily stopped and displayed as 6 symbols. May be suggested.
In addition, when suggesting the execution of the "pseudo-continuous notice" using the dedicated "pseudo-continuous execution suggestion symbol", the "pseudo-continuous execution suggestion symbol" (for example, the NEXT symbol) is newly added to the middle effect symbol 38b. If the "pseudo-continuous execution suggestion symbol" (for example, the NEXT symbol) is stopped, the execution of the "pseudo-continuous execution notice" may be suggested.
Note that the "pseudo-continuous execution suggestion symbol" (for example, the NEXT symbol) is stopped may be a temporary stop display as in the effect symbol 38, or may be a fixed stop display unlike the effect symbol 38.

(Collision detection table for winning lottery)
As shown in FIG. 11A, the hit determination table is associated with the presence / absence of a time-saving game state, a random value for hit determination, and a hit determination result.

The main CPU 110a refers to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 11A, and determines whether it is a “hit” or a “loss” based on the current time-saving game state and the acquired random value for the hit determination. judge. For example, according to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 11A, in the non-time saving game state, one specific hit determination random value of "0" is determined to be a hit. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, 15 hit determination random values from "0" to "14" are determined to be hits. If the value is a random number other than the above, it is determined to be "missing". Therefore, since the random number range of the random number value for hit determination is 0 to 15, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the non-time-saving game state is 1/16, and the probability of being determined to be a hit in the time-saving game state is 15. / 16.

(Normal symbol determination table)
As shown in FIG. 11B, in the normal symbol determination table, the presence / absence of the time-saving game state, the hit determination result, the random value for normal symbol determination, and the ordinary symbol (stopped normal symbol data) are associated with each other. There is.

The main CPU 110a refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11B, and stops and displays the normal symbol based on the current time-saving game state, the hit determination result, and the acquired normal symbol determination random value. Determine (stop map data).

Then, at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the main CPU 110a determines the normal symbol designation command as the information of the normal symbol based on the determined type of the normal symbol (stop normal symbol data), and determines the normal symbol designation command. Will be transmitted to the effect control board 120.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11D, since the opening mode of the start movable piece 15b is determined by the normal symbol (stop normal symbol data), the type of the normal symbol determines the opening mode of the start movable piece 15b. It can be said that it will be decided.

(Public map fluctuation pattern determination table)
FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern (variation time, etc.) of a normal symbol as will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 11 (c), the presence / absence of the time saving game state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, the random value for the normal figure change, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are associated with each other in the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table. ing.

The main CPU 110a refers to the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11 (c), and based on the current time saving game state, the hit determination result, and the acquired random number value for normal figure change, the normal symbol Determine the fluctuation time.

Then, at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the main CPU 110a determines the normal symbol fluctuation designation command as the information of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol based on the determined fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and determines the normal symbol fluctuation designation command. Will be transmitted to the effect control board 120.

As a feature of the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11 (c), the fluctuation time of the time-saving gaming state (3 seconds or 5 seconds) is the fluctuation time of the non-time-saving gaming state (30 seconds or 40 seconds). It is configured to be shorter than.

(Starting port opening mode determination table for movable pieces)
As shown in FIG. 11D, the start port opening mode determination table includes the stop normal figure data (normal symbol), the maximum number of times the start movable piece 15b is opened, the opening time of the auxiliary game, and the second start port 15. The opening time, the interval time, and the ending time of the auxiliary game are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the start port opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 11D, and based on the stop chart data, the maximum number of times the start movable piece 15b is opened, the opening time, the opening time, the closing time, the interval time, and the like. Determine the ending time.

In the present embodiment, in the start port opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 11D, the starting port opening mode based on the stop chart data = 02 is more advantageous than the starting mouth opening mode based on the stop chart data = 01. It is an opening mode, and the opening mode based on the stop chart data = 03 is a more advantageous opening mode than the starting port opening mode based on the stop chart data = 02.

Then, as shown in the normal symbol determination table of FIG. 11B, when a hit occurs in the time-saving game state, the stop normal map data = 03, which is the most advantageous opening mode, is selected. As a result, in the time-saving game state, the startable movable piece 15b operates more favorably to the player than in the non-time-saving game state.

(Various storage areas)
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 12A shows special figure determination information (random value for jackpot determination, special symbol determination) acquired when a game ball enters the first start port 14 or the second start port 15. It is a figure which shows the special figure determination information storage area which stores a random number value, a random value for reach determination, a random value for special figure variation), and FIG. 12 (b) is a figure of each storage part of the special figure determination information storage area. FIG. 12 (c) is a diagram showing a configuration, in which FIG. 12 (c) shows the normal symbol determination information (hit determination random value, normal symbol determination random value, normal symbol variation) acquired when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13. It is a general diagram determination information storage area in which a random value) is stored, and FIG. 12D is a diagram showing a configuration of each storage unit of the general diagram determination information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 12A, the special figure determination information storage area stores the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 14, and the first special figure determination information hold storage. The area, the second special figure judgment information reserved storage area in which the special figure judgment information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 15 is stored, and the special figure judgment information in which the variation display is being executed are stored. It is composed of a special figure execution storage area, and the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and the second special figure determination information reservation storage area are divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit, respectively. There is.

The number of undetermined special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol determination information reserved storage area is the first special symbol reservation number (U1), and these undetermined numbers are determined. The number of hold icons corresponding to the special figure judgment information is displayed in the hold icon display area 31b, and the number of undetermined special figure judgment information stored in the second special figure judgment information hold storage area is the second special symbol hold number. (U2), the number of hold icons corresponding to the undetermined special figure determination information is displayed in the hold icon display area 31b, and the variable display (variation effect) stored in the special figure execution storage area is being executed. The variation icon corresponding to the figure determination information is displayed in the variation icon display area 31a.

Further, the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 31c in the image display device 31 (see FIG. 43 and the like), and the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is an image display. It is displayed in the second special symbol reservation number display area 31d in the device 31 (see FIG. 43 and the like). The number of holds displayed in the first special symbol hold number display area 31c and the second special symbol hold number display area 31d may be simply referred to as a "hold number image". It should be noted that the "holding number image" merely notifies the holding number and does not play a role of notifying that the jackpot game may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 12B, each storage unit has a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random number value and a special symbol determination random number storage for storing a special symbol determination random number value. The area is divided into a reach determination random number storage area for storing the reach determination random number value, and a special figure variation pattern determination random number storage area for storing the special figure variation pattern determination random number value.

Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port 14 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is stored in the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit having the smallest number that is not stored. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 15 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is stored in the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit having the smallest number that is not stored.

In the special figure execution storage area, when the start condition of the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted, and the first special figure determination information is shifted. Referenced to perform variable display of symbols. Further, when the start condition of the variation display of the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area is shifted, and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Referenced to perform.

As shown in FIG. 12 (c), the normal figure determination information storage area includes a normal figure determination information holding storage area in which the normal figure determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13 is stored. It is composed of a normal map execution storage area in which the normal map determination information during execution of the variable display is stored, and the normal map determination information reservation storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit. The number of undetermined normal figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units of the normal symbol determination information hold storage area is the normal symbol hold number (G).

As shown in FIG. 12D, each storage unit has a hit determination random number storage area for storing a hit determination random number value and a normal symbol determination random number storage for storing a normal symbol determination random number value. It is divided into an area and a random number storage area for determining a normal map fluctuation pattern for storing a random number value for determining a normal map variation pattern.

Then, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13 and the normal map determination information is acquired, the normal symbol determination information is not stored in the first to fourth storage units of the normal symbol determination information reservation storage area. The acquired general map determination information is stored in the storage unit having the smallest number.

When the start condition for the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol execution storage area shifts the normal symbol judgment information stored in the first storage unit of the normal symbol judgment information reservation storage area, and displays the normal symbol variation display. Referenced to perform.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing on the main control board 110.

When power is supplied from the power supply board 140, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

First, the main CPU 110a performs the initialization process configured by steps S1 to S14. Specifically, the main CPU 110a permits access to the main RAM 110c in step S1.

In step S2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the backup flag indicating that the power is restored is set in the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is set, the process is transferred to step S3, and if the backup flag is not set, the process is transferred to step S11.

In step S3, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum of the main RAM 110c, and in step S4, the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c at the time of the previous power failure is compared with the newly calculated checksum, and the checksum is calculated. Judge whether it is normal or not. If the checksum is normal, the process is moved to step S5, and if the checksum is not normal, there is an abnormality in the data stored in the RAM 110c (the control state before the power is turned off cannot be restored normally). As a result, the process is transferred to step S11.

In step S5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 111a is ON. If the RAM clear switch 111a is not ON, the process is moved to step S6 as the process for power restoration is performed, and if the RAM clear switch 111a is ON, the process for power-on is performed. The process is transferred to step S12.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a clears the backup flag and checksum stored in the main RAM 110c, and sets the RAM at the time of power restoration. By performing this process, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power is turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power is turned off.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a makes initial settings for devices around the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the effect control board 120, the setting of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, and the like are set.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a sets a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of a power failure in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and performs processing in step S9. Transfer. As a result, the power restoration designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the power restoration notification.

The power recovery notification is a power supply that displays a power recovery screen (image) indicating that the power has been restored on the image display device 31 (for example, FIG. 72), or indicates that the power has been restored from the audio output device 32. It is to output a recovery notification sound.

It should be noted that the power recovery designation command may not include the information indicating the current gaming state, and the game state designation command indicating the current gaming status may be transmitted before or after the power recovery designation command is transmitted.

In step S9, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol storage designation command indicating the first special symbol hold number (U1) and the second special symbol hold number (U2) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, the effect control board 120 can grasp the number of special symbol reservations, and the image display device 31 has a first hold icon or a second hold icon. And the process for displaying the reserved number image will be performed.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol storage designation command indicating the number of reserved normal symbols (G) in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 can grasp the number of normal symbol storages.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a clears all the areas of the main RAM 110c, sets the RAM at the time of turning on the power, and shifts the processing to step S13.

In step S12, the main CPU 110a clears the used area of the main RAM 110c, sets the RAM at the time of turning on the power, and shifts the process to step S13. By performing this process, the progress state (control state) of the game is initialized to the initial state.

In step S13, the main CPU 110a makes initial settings for devices around the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the effect control board 120, the setting of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, and the like are set.

In step S14, the main CPU 110a sets a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized (RAM cleared) in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the process to step S15. As a result, the power-on designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the power-on notification.

The power-on notification is a RAM clear notification that displays a power-on screen (image) indicating that the power is turned on to the image display device 31 or that the main RAM 110c is initialized from the voice output device 32. It is to output sound.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the special symbol variation random value, and in step S16, the jackpot determination The initial random value, the initial random value for special symbol determination, the initial random value for hit determination, and the initial random value for normal symbol determination are updated.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power failure detection signal is input from the power failure detection circuit provided on the power supply board 140. When a power failure occurs, the process is transferred to step S18, and when a power failure does not occur, the process is transferred to step S15 so that the process loops.

The main CPU 110a prohibits timer interruption in step S18, clears the output port in step S19, calculates a checksum of the main RAM 110c in step S20, sets it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and sets it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. In step S22, the backup flag to be referred to when recovering from the power failure is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, access to the main RAM 110c is prohibited, and the device waits until the supply of the power supply voltage is completely cut off.

When the power is turned off and when the power is turned on, the checksums of all used areas of the main RAM 110c are calculated and compared, but all areas including unused areas are checked. The sums may be calculated and compared.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process on the main control board 110.

The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 generates clock pulses at predetermined cycles (4 milliseconds), so that the timer interrupt process described below is executed.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 110a into the stack area.

The main CPU 110a performs the time control process in step S110. Specifically, the update process of the special symbol time counter, the update process of the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, the update process of the normal symbol time counter, the update process of the opening / closing time of the startable movable piece 15b, etc. Performs a process of updating (subtracting 1) various timer counters.

The main CPU 110a performs a random number update process in step S120. Specifically, the process of updating the jackpot determination random value, the special symbol determination random value, the hit determination random value, the normal symbol determination random value, and the normal symbol variation random value is performed. More specifically, each random number value and random number counter are added by 1. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and each random number value is newly updated from the initial random number value at that time. ..

The main CPU 110a performs the initial random number value update process in step S130. Specifically, the process of updating (adding 1) the initial random number value for jackpot determination, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random number value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs the input control process in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 12a, the first winning opening detection switch 16a, the second winning opening detection switch 17a, the first starting opening detection switch 14a, the second starting opening detection switch 15a, and the gate detection switch 13a. It is determined whether or not there is an input to the various switches of the above, and if there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs the special figure special electric control process. Specifically, a process of controlling a big hit lottery, a variable display of a special symbol, opening / closing of the first big winning opening 16 or the second big winning opening 17, a change in the gaming state, and the like is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs the normal drawing control processing. Specifically, a process of controlling a winning lottery, a variable display of a normal symbol, opening / closing of a startable movable piece 15b, and the like is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

The main CPU 110a performs a payout control process in step S500. Specifically, each prize ball counter is referred to, and a process of generating a payout number designation command corresponding to each winning opening and setting it in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c is performed. As a result, the payout number designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 130, and a process for paying out the number of game balls corresponding to the payout number designation command from the payout device is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs the game progress data creation process in step S600. Specifically, the external information signal output from the game information output terminal plate 30, the drive data of the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 15c, the drive data of the first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c, and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c. Drive data, display data of the first special symbol display device 20, display data of the second special symbol display device 21, display data of the normal symbol display device 22, display data of the first special symbol hold display 23, second special symbol A process of creating output data related to the progress of the game, such as display data of the hold display 24 and display data of the normal symbol hold display 25, is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process in step S700. Specifically, the process of outputting the external information signal, various drive data, and various display data created in step S600 is performed. In addition, processing for transmitting commands set in the effect transmission data storage area and the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 120 and the payout control board 130 is also performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an input control process on the main control board 110.

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 12a, and when the detection signal is input, a process of adding 1 to the prize ball counter for the general winning opening is performed.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first large winning opening detection switch 16a or the second large winning opening detection switch 17a, and when the detection signal is input, it is used for the large winning opening. The process of adding 1 to the prize ball counter is performed.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs the first start port detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the first start port detection switch 14a, and when the detection signal is input, 1 is added to the prize ball counter for the first start port, and the first special If the number of symbol reservations (U1) is less than 4, the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is added by 1, and special symbol determination information is acquired to obtain a predetermined storage unit (first) of the special symbol determination information storage area. Processing is performed when the data is stored in the storage unit to the fourth storage unit). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs the second start port detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 15a is input, and when the detection signal is input, 1 is added to the prize ball counter for the second start port, and the second If the number of special symbol reservations (U2) is less than 4, the second number of special symbol reservations (U2) is added by 1, and the special symbol determination information is acquired to obtain the special symbol determination information storage area, which is a predetermined storage unit (first). The process of storing in the storage unit to the fourth storage unit) is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs the gate detection switch input process and ends the current input control process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 13a, and if the normal symbol hold number (G) is less than 4 when the detection signal is input, the normal symbol hold number (G) is set. In addition to adding 1, a process is performed in which the normal figure determination information is acquired and stored in a predetermined storage unit (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) of the normal figure determination information storage area.

(First start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The first start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a first start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal is input from the first start port detection switch 14a. If the detection signal is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and if the detection signal is not input, the first start port detection switch input process this time is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding 1 to and updating the prize ball counter (three prize ball counters) for the first starting port used for the prize ball.

In step S230-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4. If the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) is less than 4, the process is transferred to step S230-4, and if the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) is not less than 4, the first starting port of this time is used. The detection switch input process ends.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and stores it, and in step S230-5, special symbol storage indicating the first special symbol reservation number (U1). The designated command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and it becomes possible to perform processing such as displaying the first hold icon and the hold number image on the image display device 31.

In step S230-6, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure determination information, searches for the vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the first special figure determination information storage area, and searches for the vacant storage unit. The special figure judgment information acquired in is stored in.

The main CPU 110a performs the pre-determination process in step S230-7. Specifically, referring to the pre-judgment table of the jackpot lottery (not shown), the type of the special symbol display device, the jackpot determination random value acquired this time, the special symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the special figure. Performs processing to determine the planned fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation random value.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a sets a start port winning designation command indicating a scheduled variation pattern determined in the pre-determination process of step S230-7 in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and this time, the first 1 Start port detection switch input processing is completed.

As a result, the start port winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and even before the variable display of the special symbol triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 14 this time is started (1 or). It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect (expecting the execution of the jackpot game) to foretell that the jackpot game may be executed (over the variable display of a plurality of special symbols).

The effect of causing the start port lamp 14b to emit light in a color corresponding to the emission color of the hold icon described above constitutes the look-ahead effect. Therefore, the hold icon and the start port lamp 14b can be changed in color stepwise over the variable display of the plurality of special symbols. In the following, the hold icon whose color has been changed may be referred to as a "change hold icon".

(Second start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The second start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a second start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal is input from the second start port detection switch 15a. When the detection signal is input, the process proceeds to step S240-2, and when the detection signal is not input, the second start port detection switch input process this time is terminated.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding 1 to and updating the prize ball counter (one prize ball counter) for the second starting port used for the prize ball.

In step S240-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently in progress. If the auxiliary game is not in progress, the process is transferred to step S240-5, and if the auxiliary game is in progress, 1 is added to and updated in the second starting opening winning ball counter (D) in step S240-4.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is less than 4. If the number of second special symbol reservations (U2) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S240-6, and if the number of second special symbol reservations (U2) is not less than 4, the second starting port of this time is used. The detection switch input process ends.

In step S240-6, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second special symbol hold number (U2) and stores it, and in step S240-7, the special symbol storage indicating the second special symbol hold number (U2). The designated command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and processing such as displaying the second hold icon on the image display device 31 can be performed.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure determination information, searches for the vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the second special figure determination information storage area, and searches for the vacant storage unit. The special figure judgment information acquired in is stored in.

The main CPU 110a performs the pre-determination process in step S240-9. Specifically, referring to the pre-judgment table of the jackpot lottery (not shown), the type of the special symbol display device, the jackpot determination random value acquired this time, the special symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the special figure. Performs processing to determine the planned fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation random value.

In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a sets a start port winning designation command indicating a scheduled variation pattern determined in the pre-determination process of step S240-9 in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and this time, the first 2 Start port detection switch input processing is completed.

As a result, the start opening winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and even before the variable display of the special symbol triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 15 this time is started (1 or). It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect (expecting the execution of the jackpot game) to foretell that the jackpot game may be executed (over the variable display of a plurality of special symbols). The look-ahead effect using the hold icon and the start port lamp 14b can be executed, for example, when the game ball wins the second start port 15 in the high-probability game state or the time-saving game state.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special electric processing data, and if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, shifts the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing (step S310), and the special figure special electric processing data = 1. If, the process is transferred to the special symbol variation processing (step S320), if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the processing is transferred to the special symbol stop processing (step S330), and if the special symbol special electric processing data = 3, a big hit. The process is transferred to the game process (step S340), and if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the process is transferred to the jackpot game end process (step S350).

This "special figure special electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control processing as described later, so that the subroutines necessary for the progress of the game are appropriately processed. Become.

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs the special symbol memory determination process and ends the special symbol special electric control process this time. Specifically, a jackpot determination process, a special symbol determination process for determining a special symbol to be displayed as a fixed stop, a variation time determination process for determining a variation time of a special symbol, and the like are performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs the special symbol variation processing, and ends the current special symbol special electric control processing. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed is performed, and if the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, a process of shifting to the special symbol stop process of step S330 is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol stop process and ends the special symbol special electric control process this time. Specifically, the processing corresponding to the special symbols (big hit symbol, lost symbol) displayed as confirmed stop is performed, and the number of time-saving games (J), the time-saving game flag, the number of high-probability games (X), and the high-probability game flag are performed. Performs the process of setting. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S340, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game process and ends the special figure special electric control process this time. Specifically, a process for controlling a jackpot game is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game end process and ends the special figure special electric control process this time. Specifically, a process of determining a probabilistic gaming state of either a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability gaming state and determining a gaming state of either a time-saving gaming state or a non-time-saving gaming state is performed. .. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage determination process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. When the fluctuation display of the special symbol is in progress (special symbol time counter ≠ 0), the current special symbol memory determination process is terminated, and when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is not in progress (special symbol time counter = 0), the special symbol memory determination process is terminated. The process is transferred to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of second special symbol reservations (U2) is 1 or more. If the second special symbol hold number (U2) is 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-3, and if the second special symbol hold number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process is performed in step S310-4. To move. Affirming the process of step S310-2 corresponds to "establishment of starting conditions".

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the second special symbol hold number (U2) to update, and shifts the process to step S310-6.

In step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) is 1 or more. If it is determined that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process is shifted to step S310-5, and if the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, step S318- Move the process to 1. Affirming the process of step S310-4 corresponds to "establishment of starting conditions".

In step S310-5, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the first special symbol hold number (U1) to update, and shifts the process to step S310-6.

In step S310-6, the main CPU 110a determines the special figure stored in the special figure determination information reservation storage area corresponding to the number of special symbol reservations (U) subtracted in step S310-3 or step S310-5. Information shift (storage area shift) is performed. Specifically, each special figure determination information stored in the first special figure determination information storage area or the second special figure determination information storage area from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is stored immediately before. Shift to the department. Here, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the special figure execution storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the special figure determination information used in the previous variation display of the special symbol already written in the special figure execution storage area (0th storage unit) is deleted.

In the present embodiment, the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is subtracted in preference to the first special symbol reservation number (U1), but the first special symbol is in the order in which the starting port is won. The number of holdings (U1) and the number of holdings of the second special symbol (U2) may be subtracted, or the number of holdings of the first special symbol (U1) may be subtracted in preference to the number of holdings of the second special symbol (U2). You may try to do it.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a indicates the first special symbol hold number (U1) or the second special symbol hold number (U2) subtracted in step S310-3 or step S310-5. The symbol memory designation command is determined, and the determined special symbol memory designation command is set in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, a special symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 to reduce the number of the first hold icon or the second hold icon displayed on the image display device 31, or to reduce the number of the first hold icon or the first hold icon, or. A process of changing the second hold icon to the variable icon will be performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process in step S311. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 5, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on the stochastic game state and the jackpot determination random value stored in the special figure execution storage area. With reference to the special symbol determination table shown in 6, the special symbol type (stop) based on the special symbol display device (type of start port) and the special symbol determination random value stored in the special symbol execution storage area. Special figure data) is determined. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure variation pattern determination process. Specifically, referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10, the special symbol display device (type of starting port), the result of the jackpot lottery, the special symbol, the number of special symbol reservations (U), and the special symbol execution. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the reach determination random value stored in the storage area and the special symbol fluctuation random value.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the variation effect according to the variation pattern so as to correspond to the variation display of the special symbol. ..

In step S314, the main CPU 110a confirms the game state at the start of the fluctuation, and sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the game state can be grasped on the effect control board 120.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation time (counter value) of the special symbol based on the fluctuation pattern determined in step S312 in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 ms in S110.

In step S316, the main CPU 110a starts the variable display of the special symbol. Specifically, the variable display data of the special symbol is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 creates display data for variable display of the special symbol in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700. As a result, the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 will perform variable display of the special symbol.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, prepares to move the process to the special symbol variation process shown in FIG. 21, and ends the special symbol memory determination process this time.

In step S318-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a customer waiting state flag indicating that the special symbol variation display or the jackpot game is not executed in the customer waiting state (standby state). If there is a customer waiting state flag, the special symbol memory determination process this time is ended, and if there is no customer waiting state flag, the process is moved to step S318-2.

In step S318-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag indicating that the customer is in the customer waiting state in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S318-3, the customer waiting state indicating that the customer is in the customer waiting state. The specified command is set in the transmission data storage area for effect, and the special symbol storage determination process this time is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the customer waiting effect.

(Big hit judgment process of main control board)
The jackpot determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process on the main control board 110.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a big hit. Specifically, when the special figure determination information stored in the special figure execution storage area is shifted from the first special figure determination information reservation storage area, the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. 5A is performed. When the special figure judgment information stored in the special figure execution storage area is shifted from the second special figure judgment information reserved storage area with reference to the jackpot judgment table, the jackpot shown in FIG. 5 (b) is shown. The jackpot determination table of the lottery is referred to, and whether or not it is a "big hit" is determined based on the jackpot determination random value stored in the special figure execution storage area. If it is a big hit, the process is transferred to step S311-2, and if it is not a big hit, the process is transferred to step S311-5.

The main CPU 110a performs the jackpot symbol determination process in step S311-2. Specifically, the jackpot special symbol to be fixedly stopped and displayed based on the special symbol determination random value stored in the special symbol execution storage area with reference to the special symbol determination table in the jackpot shown in FIG. 6 (b). The type is determined, and the stop special figure data corresponding to the determined type of jackpot special symbol is set in the stop special figure data storage area.

The stop special figure data set in the stop special figure data storage area is used for determining whether or not the special symbol is a "big hit symbol" in the special symbol stop process of FIG. 22, which will be described later, and the big hit game process of FIG. 23. It is also used to determine the operating mode of the big winning opening, and is also used to determine the game state after the big hit in the big hit game ending process of FIG. 24.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a sets the effect symbol designation command for jackpot corresponding to the stop special figure data determined in step S311-2 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and it becomes possible to grasp the type of the jackpot special symbol (stop special symbol data) that is fixedly stopped and displayed on the effect control board 120.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a determines the game state at the time of winning the jackpot from the information set in the game state storage area (time-saving game flag storage area, high-probability game flag storage area), and determines the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. The game status information indicating the above is set in the game status buffer. Specifically, if both the time-saving game flag and the high-probability game flag are not set, 00H is set, and if the time-saving game flag is not set but the high-probability game flag is set, 01H is set. If the time saving game flag is set but the high probability game flag is not set, 02H is set, and if both the time saving game flag and the high probability game flag are set, 03H is set.

In this way, apart from the game state storage area (time-saving game flag storage area, high-probability game flag storage area), the game state at the time of jackpot winning is set in the game status buffer because the game is played during the jackpot game. Since the high-probability game flag and the short-time game flag in the state storage area (time-saving game flag storage area, high-probability game flag storage area) are reset, a new game state at the time of winning the big hit is newly performed after the big hit is completed. This is because the game state storage area cannot be referred to when determining the game state at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, by providing a game state buffer for storing game information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot separately from the game state storage area, the game information in the game state buffer can be referred to after the jackpot ends. Based on the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the game state after the end of the big hit (time-saving game state, number of time-saving games, etc.) can be newly set.

In step S311-5, the main CPU 110a performs a loss symbol determination process. Specifically, the lost special symbol to be fixedly stopped and displayed based on the special symbol determination random value stored in the special symbol execution storage area with reference to the special symbol determination table in the loss shown in FIG. 6A. The type is determined, and the stop special figure data corresponding to the determined type of lost special symbol is set in the stop special figure data storage area.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a sets the effect symbol designation command for loss corresponding to the stop special figure data determined in step S311-5 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and this time. The jackpot judgment process ends. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and it becomes possible to grasp the type (stop special symbol data) of the lost special symbol displayed on the effect control board 120 as a fixed stop.

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control board)
The special symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process on the main control board 110.

In step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in the special symbol time counter has elapsed. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation processing this time is terminated, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S320-2.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a causes the variable display of the special symbol to be fixedly stopped and displayed. Specifically, the variation display data set in step S316 is cleared, and the special symbol set in steps S311-2 and S311-5 is displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol. The stop display data for displaying the fixed stop display on the display device 21 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21, and the player is notified of the jackpot determination result.

In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a sets a symbol confirmation command indicating that the special symbol has been confirmed and stopped displayed in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for terminating the variation effect.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a sets the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) for displaying the fixed stop display of the special symbol in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is updated by subtracting 1 every 4 ms in S110.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a sets 2 in the special symbol special electric processing data, prepares to move the process to the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 23, and ends the special symbol variation process this time.

(Special symbol stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stop processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process on the main control board 110.

In step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the symbol stop time set in step S320-4 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0?). When the symbol stop time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S330-2, and when the symbol stop time has not elapsed, the special symbol stop process this time is terminated.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a performs the time saving game end determination process. Specifically, when the time saving game flag is set in the main RAM 110c, 1 is subtracted from the time saving game count (J) to update, and whether or not the new time saving game count (J) is "0". Is determined. As a result, when the number of time-saving games (J) is "0", the time-saving game flag is cleared and the process proceeds to step S330-3. On the other hand, if the time saving game flag is not set, or if the time saving game count (J) is not "0", the process proceeds to step S330-3 as it is.

The main CPU 110a performs the high-probability game end determination process in step S330-3. Specifically, when the high-probability game flag is set in the main RAM 110c, 1 is subtracted from the high-probability game count (X) to update, and the new high-probability game count (X) is "0". Determine if it exists. As a result, when the number of high-probability games (X) is "0", the high-probability game flag is cleared and the process proceeds to step S330-4. On the other hand, if the high-probability game flag is not set, or if the high-probability game count (X) is not "0", the process proceeds to step S330-4 as it is.

In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the game state can be grasped on the effect control board 120.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop special figure data stored in the stop special figure data storage area is a jackpot symbol. If it is a jackpot symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-7, and if it is not a jackpot symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-6.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the special symbol special electric processing data, prepares to move the process to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 19, and ends the special symbol stop process this time.

In step S330-7, the main CPU 110a sets 3 in the special figure special electric processing data, and prepares to move the processing to the jackpot game processing shown in FIG. 23.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a performs the normal game state transition process. Specifically, the high-probability game flag, the high-probability game count (X), the time-saving game flag, and the time-saving game number (J) are cleared to shift to the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state).

In step S330-9, the main CPU 110a performs the jackpot start preparation setting process. Specifically, the type of the jackpot game is determined based on the stop special figure data with reference to the special electric accessory operating mode determination table shown in FIG. 8, and the jackpot opening mode for the jackpot shown in FIG. 9 is determined. From the table group, a big winning opening opening mode determination table (“1st big hit TBL”, “2nd big hit TBL”, “3rd big hit TBL”) is decided according to the type of big hit game.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command according to the type of jackpot game (first jackpot game to third jackpot game) in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the opening effect of the jackpot game.

In step S330-11, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the jackpot game in the special game timer counter, and ends the special symbol stop process this time. Specifically, the opening time according to the type of the jackpot game is determined from the big winning opening opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9, and is set in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

(Big hit game processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot game is currently being opened. Specifically, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the round game count (R) storage area. If it is in the opening, the process is transferred to step S340-2, and if it is not in the opening, the process is transferred to S340-6.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the special game timer counter has elapsed. If the opening time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process this time is ended, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S340-3.

In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a sets 1 to the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area.

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs the large winning opening opening process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of times of opening (K), and the energization data for energizing the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c is set, and the above With reference to the large winning opening opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9, the first large winning opening 16 is based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of opening (K). Alternatively, the opening time of the second special winning opening 17 is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the first prize opening 16 or the second prize opening 17 will be opened.

In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a performs a round designation command transmission determination process. Specifically, when the number of times of opening (K) is "1", that is, when the round game is started, the round designation command corresponding to the number of times of round game (R) is stored in the transmission data for production of the main RAM 110c. Set in the area. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the round effect of the jackpot game.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot game is currently ending. The ending is the period after all the preset round games are completed. If the ending is in progress, the process is transferred to step S340-18, and if the ending is not in progress, the process is transferred to step S340-7.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the large winning opening is closed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the energization data for energizing the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c is set. If the large winning opening is closed, the process is transferred to step S340-8, and if the large winning opening is not closed, the process is transferred to step S340-9.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the large winning opening set in the special game timer counter has elapsed. If the closing time has not passed, the jackpot game process of this time is ended, and if the closing time has passed, the process is moved to step S340-4 in order to open the big winning opening.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening end condition for ending the opening of the large winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, either the value of the large winning opening winning ball counter (C) reaches the specified number (9 pieces) or the opening time per opening in the number of opening times (K) elapses. Determine if it holds. If it is determined that the opening end condition is satisfied, the process is moved to step S340-10, and if it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening closing process. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c is cleared, and the large winning opening opening mode determined in step S330-9 is determined. With reference to the table (see FIG. 9), the closing time of the first prize opening 16 or the second prize opening 17 (see the second prize opening 17) based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of openings (K). The closing interval time or one closing time) is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the first prize opening 16 or the second prize opening 17 will be closed.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S340-11 whether or not one round has been completed. Specifically, whether or not the value of the large winning opening winning ball counter (C) reaches the specified number (9 pieces) and the number of opening times (K) becomes the maximum number of opening times is satisfied. Is determined. When one round is completed, the process is moved to step S340-12, and when one round is not completed, the current jackpot game process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs the round data initialization process in step S340-12. Specifically, the number of times of opening (K) and the large winning opening winning ball counter (C) are cleared. However, the number of round games (R) is not cleared.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of round games (R) is the maximum number of round games. If it is the maximum number of round games, the process is transferred to step S340-15, and if it is not the maximum number of round games, the process is transferred to step S340-14.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the number of round games (R) and stores the game, and ends the current jackpot game process.

The main CPU 110a clears the number of round games (R) in step S340-15, and in step S340-16, based on the large winning opening opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9. , The type of special game (long hit game, short hit game, development hit game) is determined, and the ending designation command according to the type of big hit game is set in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the ending effect of the jackpot game.

In step S340-17, the main CPU 110a sets the ending time according to the type of jackpot game to the special game timer counter based on the big winning opening opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9. set.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time set in the special game timer counter has elapsed. When the ending time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S340-19, and when the ending time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process is ended.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a sets 4 in the special figure special electric processing data, prepares to move the processing to the big hit game end processing shown in FIG. 24, and ends the current big hit game processing.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game end process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game end process on the main control board 110.

In step S350-1, the main CPU 110a loads the stop special figure data set in the stop special figure data storage area and the game state information in the game state buffer.

The main CPU 110a performs the high-probability game flag setting process in step S350-2. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot game end setting data table shown in FIG. 7, whether or not to shift to the high-probability gaming state at the end of the jackpot game based on the loaded stop special figure data and the game state information. When determining whether or not to shift to the high-probability gaming state, a high-probability gaming flag indicating that the high-probability gaming state is set is set in the high-probability gaming flag storage area. For example, if the stop special figure data is "01", the high probability game flag is set.

The main CPU 110a performs the high-probability game number setting process in step S350-3. Specifically, it is the number of fluctuation displays that can be executed in the high-probability game state based on the loaded stop special figure data and the game state information with reference to the jackpot game end setting data table shown in FIG. The high-probability game count (X) is determined, and the determined high-probability game count (X) is set in the high-probability game count (X) storage area.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a performs the time saving game flag setting process. Specifically, referring to the jackpot game end time setting data table shown in FIG. 7, whether or not to shift to the time saving game state at the end of the jackpot game is determined based on the loaded stop special figure data and the game information. When making a determination and shifting to the time-saving game state, a time-saving game flag indicating that the time-saving game state is set is set in the time-saving game flag storage area.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a performs a time-saving game number determination process. Specifically, referring to the jackpot game end time setting data table shown in FIG. 7, the time reduction is the number of fluctuation displays that can be executed in the time reduction game state based on the loaded stop special figure data and the game state information. The number of games (J) is determined, and the determined number of time-saving games (J) is set in the time-saving game number (J) storage area.

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a confirms the presence / absence of the high-probability game flag and the time-saving game flag, specifies the game state, and sends a game state designation command indicating the specified game state to the transmission data storage area for production. set. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the game state can be grasped by the effect control board 120.

In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the special figure special electric processing data, prepares to move the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 19, and ends the current jackpot game end processing.

(Fundamental control processing of the main control board)
The general control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a general-purpose electric power control process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the Fuzu Fuden processing data, and if the Fuzu Fuden processing data = 0, shifts the processing to the normal symbol variation processing (step S410), and the Fuzu Fuden processing data. If = 1, the process is transferred to the auxiliary game process (step S420).

As will be described later, this "Fuzu Fuden processing data" is set as needed in each subroutine of the Fuzu Fuden control processing, so the subroutines necessary for the progress of the game are processed as appropriate. It will be.

In step S410, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol variation process and ends the current normal symbol control process. Specifically, a hit determination process, a process of displaying a normal symbol in a variable manner, a process of stopping and displaying a normal symbol, and the like are performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S420, the main CPU 110a performs an auxiliary game process and ends the current Fuzu Fuden control process. Specifically, a process for controlling an auxiliary game is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

(Normal symbol variation processing of main control board)
The normal symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process on the main control board 110.

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation display of the normal symbol is in progress. If the variation display of the normal symbol is in progress, the process is transferred to step S410-9, and if the variation display of the normal symbol is not in progress, the process is transferred to step S410-2.

In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal symbol hold number (G) is 1 or more. If the number of normal symbol reservations (G) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S410-3, and if the number of normal symbol reservations (G) is not 1 or more, the current normal symbol variation processing is terminated.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the normal symbol hold number (G) to update, and shifts the process to step S410-4.

In step S410-4, the main CPU 110a shifts the normal symbol determination information stored in the normal symbol hold storage area. Specifically, each normal map determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit. Here, the normal map determination information stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the normal map execution storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the special figure determination information used in the previous variation display of the normal symbol, which has already been written in the normal figure execution storage area (0th storage unit), is deleted.

The main CPU 110a performs a hit determination process in step S410-5. Specifically, with reference to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 11A, it is determined whether or not there is a hit based on the game state and the hit determination random value stored in the normal figure execution storage area. ..

The main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol determination process in step S410-6. Specifically, with reference to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11B, the stop display is based on the current time-saving game state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the acquired random number value for normal symbol determination. The normal symbol (stop normal figure data) to be executed is determined, the determined stop normal figure data is set in the stop normal figure data storage area, and the normal figure designation command corresponding to the stop normal figure data is stored in the transmission data for production of the main RAM 110c. Set in the area. As a result, the normal map designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the stop normal map data can be grasped on the effect control board 120.

In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a performs the fluctuation time determination process of the normal symbol. Specifically, referring to the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11 (c), it is normal based on the game state, the hit determination result, and the normal map fluctuation random value stored in the normal map execution storage area. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined and set in the normal symbol time counter, and the normal symbol fluctuation designation command corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol variation designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 can grasp the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

In step S410-8, the main CPU 110a starts the variation display of the normal symbol and ends the current variation process of the normal symbol. Specifically, the variable display data of the normal symbol is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, display data for variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 22 is created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700, so that the normal symbol display device 22 displays the normal symbol. The variable display will be performed.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in the normal symbol time counter has elapsed. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the normal symbol variation processing this time is terminated, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S410-10.

In step S410-10, the main CPU 110a stops the variable display of the normal symbol. Specifically, the main stop display data is for clearing the variation display data set in step S410-8 and causing the normal symbol display device 22 to stop and display the normal symbol set in step S410-6. It is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22, and the player is notified of the hit determination result.

In step S410-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop normal figure data set in the stop normal figure data storage area is a hit normal symbol. If it is a hit normal symbol, the process is moved to step S410-12, and if it is not a hit normal symbol, the current normal symbol variation process is ended.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a sets the normal drawing data = 1 and prepares to move the processing to the auxiliary game processing shown in FIG. 27, and in step S410-13, performs the opening mode determination processing. Specifically, referring to the start opening opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 11D, the maximum number of times the starting movable piece 15b is opened, the opening time of the auxiliary game, and the second starting opening 15 are based on the stop chart data. Determine the opening time, interval time, and ending time of the auxiliary game.

In step S410-14, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the auxiliary game in the auxiliary game timer counter, and ends the normal symbol variation process this time. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

(Auxiliary game processing of main control board)
The auxiliary game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the auxiliary game processing on the main control board 110.

First, in step S420-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently being opened. If it is in the opening, the process is transferred to step S420-2, and if it is not in the opening, the process is transferred to S420-4.

In step S420-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the auxiliary game timer counter has elapsed. If the opening time has not elapsed, the auxiliary game process this time is ended, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S420-3.

In step S420-3, the main CPU 110a performs the second start opening opening process and ends the auxiliary game process this time. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of times of opening (S), energization data for energizing the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 15c is set, and the second starting port 15 corresponding to the number of times of opening (S) is set. Set the opening time of to the auxiliary game timer counter. As a result, the second starting port 15 is opened.

In step S420-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently ending. If the ending is in progress, the process is transferred to step S420-12, and if the ending is not in progress, the process is transferred to step S420-5.

In step S420-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second starting port 15 is closed (interval). Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the second start port opening / closing solenoid 15c is set. If the second starting port 15 is closed, the process is transferred to step S420-6, and if the second starting port 15 is not closed, the process is transferred to step S420-7.

In step S420-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time (interval time) of the second starting port 15 set in the auxiliary game timer counter has elapsed. If the closing time has not elapsed, the auxiliary processing this time is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the processing is moved to step S420-3 in order to open the second starting port 15.

In step S420-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening end condition for ending the opening of the second starting port 15 is satisfied. Specifically, either the value of the second starting opening winning ball counter (D) reaches the specified number (10 pieces) or the opening time per opening in the number of opening times (S) elapses. Is determined. If it is determined that the opening end condition is satisfied, the process is moved to step S420-8, and if it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied, the auxiliary game process this time is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs the second start port closing process in step S420-8. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the second start port opening / closing solenoid 15c is cleared, and the closing time of the second start port 15 determined in step S410-13 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter. As a result, the second starting port 15 is closed.

In step S420-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game ends. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of times (S) of opening the second starting port is the maximum number of times of opening. When ending the auxiliary game, the process is moved to step S420-10, and when the auxiliary game is not ended, the current auxiliary game process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs the auxiliary game end process in step S420-10. Specifically, the number of times of opening (S) and the second starting opening winning ball counter (D) are cleared.

In step S420-11, the main CPU 110a sets the ending time determined in step S410-13 in the auxiliary game timer counter.

In step S420-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time set in the auxiliary game timer counter has elapsed. When the ending time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S420-13, and when the ending time has not elapsed, the auxiliary game process this time is ended.

In step S420-13, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the normal symbol processing data, prepares to move the processing to the normal symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 26, and ends the auxiliary game processing this time.

(Main processing of the production control unit)
The process executed by the sub CPU 120a in the effect control unit 120 m will be described. First, the main process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the effect control unit 120 m.

First, the sub CPU 120a performs the initialization process in step S1000. In this process, the sub CPU 120a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 120b and initializes and sets the flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 120c in response to the power being turned on.

The sub CPU 120a performs the sub random number update process in step S1100. In this process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of updating various random value values stored in the sub RAM 120c. After that, the process of step S1100 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the effect control unit 120 m. Although not shown, the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 120 m generates a clock pulse at predetermined intervals (2 milliseconds), reads the timer interrupt processing program, and reads the effect control board. Timer interrupt processing is executed.

In step S1300, the sub CPU 120a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 120a into the stack area.

In step S1400, the sub CPU 120a performs a command analysis process. In this process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of analyzing the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31.

When the effect control unit 120m receives a command transmitted from the main control board 110, a command reception interrupt process of the effect control unit 120m (not shown) occurs, and the received command is stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c. It has become.

In step S1500, the sub CPU 120a performs a timer update process for updating various timer counters used by the effect control unit 120m.

In step S1700, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the signals of the effect button detection switch 35a and the cross button detection switch 36b are input, and when the signals of the effect button detection switch 35a and the like are input, the display / Performs an effect input control process for transmitting an effect button signal or the like to the voice control unit 150.

In step S1800, the sub CPU 120a performs data output processing for transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c to the lamp / drive control unit 160 and the display / voice control unit 150.

In step S1900, the sub CPU 120a restores the information saved in step S1300 to the register of the sub CPU 120a.

(Command analysis processing of the production control unit)
Next, the command analysis process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process (1) in the effect control unit 120 m, and FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process (2) in the effect control unit 120 m. The command analysis process (2) is performed following the command analysis process (1).

In step S1401, the sub CPU 120a refers to the reception buffer and determines whether or not a command has been received. If a command has been received, the process is moved to step S1402, and if no command has been received, the command analysis process this time is terminated.

In step S1402, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol memory designation command, the process is transferred to step S1403, and if it is not a special symbol memory designation command, the process is transferred to step S1404.

In step S1403, the sub CPU 120a performs the hold storage update process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, the number of reserved storages is analyzed from the received special symbol storage designation command, and the analyzed number of reserved storages is set in the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 120c.

In step S1404, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the start opening winning designation command. If it is a start opening prize designation command, the process is transferred to step S1405, and if it is not a start opening prize designation command, the process is transferred to step S1406.

In step S1405, the sub CPU 120a performs the icon change effect determination process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, based on the content of the received start opening winning designation command, processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the change scenario.

The icon change effect corresponds to an effect using the above-mentioned hold icon and the start port lamp 14b.

In step S1406, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect symbol designation command. If it is an effect symbol designation command, the process is transferred to step S1407, and if it is not an effect symbol designation command, the process is transferred to step S1408.

In step S1407, the sub CPU 120a performs the basic symbol data determination process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, it is for determining the basic symbol data (1st to 3rd jackpot symbol data, lost symbol data) that makes it possible to identify the presence or absence of a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the content of the received effect symbol designation command. Perform processing.

In step S1408, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern designation command. If it is a variation pattern specification command, the process is transferred to step S1409, and if it is not a variation pattern specification command, the process is transferred to step S1412.

In step S1409, the sub CPU 120a performs a variation effect pattern determination process. Specifically, based on the content of the received variation pattern designation command, the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect executed by using various effect devices, is determined, and the variation effect pattern is determined according to the determined variation effect pattern. The process of setting the variation effect pattern command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the variation effect pattern command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 150 and the lamp / drive control unit 160, and processing for executing the variation effect is performed. The details of this variation effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 32.

The sub CPU 120a performs the icon display mode update process in step S1410. Specifically, based on the change scenario determined by the icon change effect determination process described above and the determined variation effect pattern, the hold icon displayed on the image display device 31 and the display mode of the variation icon are updated. Then, the process for executing the icon change effect is performed.

In step S1411, the sub CPU 120a performs a jackpot notice effect determination process. Specifically, based on the determined variable effect pattern, processing is performed to determine the presence / absence of the jackpot advance notice effect, the type of the jackpot advance notice effect to be executed, and the like. The details of this jackpot notice effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

The jackpot notice effect is an effect that suggests that the jackpot game may be executed as a result of the variable effect being executed (expects that the jackpot game is executed), or the result of the jackpot determination. It is a production that suggests.

In step S1412, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a symbol determination command. If it is a symbol confirmation command, the process is transferred to step S1413, and if it is not a symbol confirmation command, the process is transferred to step S1414.

In step S1413, the sub CPU 120a performs the effect symbol determination stop process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, in order to display the effect symbol 38 as a fixed stop, a process of setting a stop designation command for displaying the effect symbol as a fixed stop is performed in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the stop designation command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 150 and the lamp / drive control unit 160, and processing for displaying the variation effect as a fixed stop display is performed.

In step S1414, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a game state designation command. If it is a game state specification command, the process is transferred to step S1415, and if it is not a game state specification command, the process is transferred to step S1416.

In step S1415, the sub CPU 120a performs the game state setting process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, the current game state is specified with reference to the received game state designation command, and data indicating the specified game state is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c.

In step S1416, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is the opening designation command. If it is an opening designation command, the process is transferred to step S1417, and if it is not an opening designation command, the process is transferred to step S1418.

In step S1417, the sub CPU 120a performs the opening effect pattern determination process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, based on the opening designation command, the effect pattern of the opening effect performed at the start of the jackpot game is determined, and the opening effect specification command corresponding to the determined effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. Do. As a result, the opening effect designation command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 150 and the lamp / drive control unit 160, and processing for executing the opening effect is performed.

In step S1418, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a round designation command. If it is a round designation command, the process is transferred to step S1419, and if there is no round designation command, the process is transferred to step S1420.

In step S1419, the sub CPU 120a performs the round effect pattern determination process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, based on the round designation command, the effect pattern of the round effect performed during the round game is determined, and the round effect specification command corresponding to the determined effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. .. As a result, the round effect designation command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 150 and the lamp / drive control unit 160, and processing for executing the round effect is performed.

In step S1420, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is the ending designation command. If it is an ending designation command, the process is transferred to step S1421, and if it is not an ending designation command, the process is transferred to step S1422.

In step S1421, the sub CPU 120a performs the jackpot end effect pattern determination process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, based on the ending designation command, the effect pattern of the ending effect to be performed at the end of the jackpot game is determined, and the ending specification command corresponding to the determined effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. .. As a result, the ending effect designation command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 150 and the lamp / drive control unit 160, and processing for executing the ending effect is performed.

In step S1422, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. If it is a customer waiting state specification command, the process is moved to step S1423, and if it is not a customer waiting state specification command, the current command analysis process is terminated.

In step S1423, the sub CPU 120a performs the customer waiting effect determination process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, based on the customer waiting state designation command, the customer waiting effect to be performed in the customer waiting state (customer waiting period) is determined, and the customer waiting effect designation command corresponding to the determined customer waiting effect is transmitted to the sub RAM 120c. Performs the process of setting in the buffer. As a result, the customer waiting effect designation command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 150 and the lamp / drive control unit 160, and processing for executing the customer waiting effect is performed.

(Variable effect pattern determination process)
Next, the variation effect pattern determination process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 120 m.

The sub CPU 120a refers to the received variation pattern designation command in step S1441-1 and selects the variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 33) in step S1441-2.

In step S1441-3, the sub CPU 120a refers to the variation effect pattern determination table and determines one variation effect pattern from the plurality of variation effect patterns based on the variation pattern designation command and the distribution ratio (%). .. Details of this variation effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

In step S1441-4, the sub CPU 120a sets the variation effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and ends the current variation effect pattern determination process. As a result, the variation effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 150 and the lamp / drive control unit 160, and processing for executing the variation effect is performed.

(Variable production pattern determination table)
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a variation effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the variation effect pattern. The variation effect pattern determination table is associated with the variation effect pattern specification command, the distribution ratio (%) for each variation effect pattern, and the determined variation effect pattern, and the effect configuration for each variation effect pattern is used as a reference. Is described.

The variation effect pattern is an variation performed by using the effect devices of the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the panel drive device 33, the panel lighting device 34a, the frame lighting device 34b, the effect button 35, and the cross button 36. It is a production mode of the production, and the presence / absence of a pseudo continuous notice, the presence / absence of a reach production, the content of the reach production, and the like are defined.

Here, each term described in the effect configuration of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 33 will be described.

The “normal variation” indicates that a normal variation effect is performed in which the reach state is not formed by the effect symbol 38.
The “shortening variation” indicates that the shortening variation effect is performed in which the variation time is shorter than that of the normal variation effect and the reach state is not formed by the effect symbol 38.
The "normal reach" indicates that a normal reach effect is performed in which a reach state is formed by the effect symbol 38.
The “SP reach” indicates that the reach state is formed by the effect symbol 38, and the SP reach effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect is performed.
The “SPSP reach” indicates that the reach state is formed by the effect symbol 38, and the SPSP reach effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the SP reach effect is performed.

The “design fanning failure” indicates that the fanning effect of whether or not the reach state is formed by the left and right effect symbols 38 is executed, but the result is that the reach state is not finally formed.
The "successful symbol fanning" indicates that the fanning effect of whether or not the reach state is formed by the left and right effect symbols 38 is executed, and the result is that the reach state is finally formed.

The "pseudo-continuous failure" indicates that a fanning effect of whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice is executed is executed, but the result is that the pseudo-continuous notice is not executed in the end.
The "pseudo-continuous success" indicates that a fanning effect of whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice is executed is executed, and finally the pseudo-continuous notice is executed.
"Pseudo-continuous success after reach" indicates that the pseudo-continuous notice is executed after the reach state is formed.

“Button non-collision” means that an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 35 is executed in the final phase (final stage) of the corresponding reach effect, and whether the effect button 35 is operated or the effect button 35 is operated in this operation promotion effect. When the valid period elapses, a winning notification effect for notifying whether or not it is a big hit is executed, but the effect button 35 does not move upward during the valid period in this operation promotion effect and is maintained in a non-protruding state (normal state). It shows that it will be done.
“Button thrust” means that an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 35 is executed in the final phase (final stage) of the corresponding reach effect, and whether the effect button 35 is operated or the effect button 35 is effective in this operation promotion effect. When the period elapses, a winning notification effect for notifying whether or not it is a big hit is executed, but it is shown that the effect button 35 moves upward during the valid period in this operation promotion effect and becomes a protruding state (special state). ing.

In the present embodiment, for example, the effect button 35 is provided as an operation device to be operated by the player in the final phase (final stage) of the corresponding reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, another operating means may be provided in addition to the effect button 35. Specifically, an effect lever may be provided.
The effect lever may be provided integrally with the effect button 35, or may be provided separately.
When the effect lever is provided, it may be easier to select an effect for operating the effect lever than the effect button 35 in the final phase (final stage) of the corresponding reach effect in the case of a big hit.
That is, "button non-collision" may be read as "effect button 35", and "button thrust" may be read as "effect lever".

The "revival effect" means that the loss is once notified at the final stage (final stage) of the SP reach or SPSP reach, and then the first decorative member 33a or the second decorative member is displayed during the temporary stop display period before the fixed stop display is displayed. It is an effect of operating 33b to notify the jackpot in a reverse manner.

The "specific image" is an image displayed on the image display device 31 after notifying the loss at SP reach or higher, and in particular, SP reach or SPSP reach is executed from the background image on which SP reach or SPSP reach is executed. This is an image displayed on the image display device 31 when switching to the previous background image.
In addition, the "specific image" is always displayed if it is equal to or higher than the SP reach of the loss, and in the case of a big hit, it is displayed if it is a variable effect pattern (variable effect pattern 30) that performs "revival effect". It is supposed to be done.
That is, the "specific image" is characterized in that a variable effect pattern having a loss SP reach or higher is more likely to be displayed than a variable effect pattern having a jackpot SP reach or higher.
A display example of the "specific image" will be described in detail later with reference to an animation diagram.

The first feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 33 is that the reach effect is more likely to be executed when the pseudo continuous advance notice effect is executed than when the pseudo continuous advance notice is not executed, and the pseudo continuous advance notice is executed. The point is that the higher the number of executions of, the higher the expectation of a big hit. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation regarding whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice is executed or the number of times the pseudo-continuous notice is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a second feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 33, the effect is more than the case where the effect button 35 remains in the normal state during the effective period generated in the final phase (final stage) of the reach effect. The point that the jackpot expectation is higher when the button 35 is in a special state can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the effect button 35 is in a special state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
When the effect button 35 is in the normal state, a "first operation promotion image" is displayed on the image display device 31 as an operation promotion image for prompting the operation of the effect button 35 (for example, the "first operation promotion image" in FIG. 62. (See "Operation promotion image"), when the effect button 35 is in a special state, a "second operation promotion image" is displayed on the image display device 31 as an operation promotion image for prompting the operation of the effect button 35 (for example,). See "second operation promotion image" in FIG. 62).

(Big hit notice production decision processing)
Next, the jackpot advance notice effect determination process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a jackpot advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 120 m.

First, the sub CPU 120a refers to the variation effect pattern determined in step S1443-1, and in step S1443-2, the presence or absence of execution of the pre-reach advance notice effect using the pre-reach advance notice determination table (see FIG. 35). And determine the notice pattern that defines the type of pre-reach notice effect to be executed. Details of this pre-reach notice determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1443-3 whether or not the determined advance notice pattern is a advance notice pattern for executing the dialogue advance notice effect. If it is a notice pattern that executes the dialogue notice effect, the process is moved to step S1443-4, and if it is a notice pattern that does not execute the dialogue notice effect, the process is moved to step S1443-6.

The dialogue advance notice effect is a jackpot advance notice effect in which the image display device 31 displays a dialogue suggesting a jackpot expectation level based on the operation of the effect button 35, and the voice corresponding to the dialogue is output from the voice output device 32. It is one of the types.

In step S1443-4, the sub CPU 120a determines a serif pattern, which is an effect mode of the serif notice effect, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c by using the serif pattern determination table (see FIG. 36A). Details of this dialogue pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 36 (a).

In step S1443-5, the sub CPU 120a sets the dialogue advance notice effect designation command corresponding to the determined dialogue pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the dialogue advance notice effect designation command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 150 and the lamp / drive control unit 160, and processing for executing the dialogue advance notice effect is performed.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1443-6 whether or not the determined advance notice pattern is a advance notice pattern for executing the step-up advance notice effect (SU advance notice effect). If it is a notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the process is moved to step S1443-7, and if it is not a notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the process is moved to step S1443-9.

In addition, the step-up notice effect is a predetermined step from the first step to any one of a plurality of steps (steps) from the first step (first step) to the final step (final step) according to the jackpot expectation. It is a kind of jackpot notice production that executes step production in order. Specifically, more step effects are more likely to be executed when the jackpot game is executed (higher expectation of the jackpot) than when the jackpot game is not executed.

In step S1443-7, the sub CPU 120a determines a step-up pattern, which is an effect mode of the step-up notice effect, using the step-up pattern determination table (see FIG. 36B), and sets the sub-RAM 120a in a predetermined area. set. Details of this step-up pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 36 (b).

In step S1443-8, the sub CPU 120a sets the step-up notice effect designation command corresponding to the determined step-up pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the step-up notice effect designation command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 150 and the lamp / drive control unit 160, and processing for executing the step-up notice effect is performed.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1443-9 whether or not the determined advance notice pattern is a advance notice pattern for executing the roulette advance notice effect. If it is a notice pattern for executing the roulette notice effect, the process is moved to step S1443-10, and if it is not a notice pattern for executing the roulette notice effect, the process is moved to step S1443-12.

In the roulette notice effect, a plurality of selection icons are displayed, the cursor image is rotated and displayed on the plurality of selection icons, and after a predetermined time elapses, the image to be carved on any one of the selection icons is stopped ( (Select any one of the selection icons), and it is one of the jackpot notice effects that execute the effect shown by the selected selection icon. For example, when the selection icon "SP" is selected, "SP reach" will be executed. In addition, it is easier to select the selection icons such as "super heat" and "rainbow" when the jackpot game is executed (higher expectation of jackpot) than when the jackpot game is not executed. ..

In step S1443-10, the sub CPU 120a determines the roulette pattern and the selection icon, which are the production modes of the roulette notice effect, using the roulette pattern determination table (see FIG. 37C), and determines a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. Set to. Details of this roulette pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 37 (c).

In step S1443-11, the sub CPU 120a sets a roulette notice effect designation command corresponding to the determined roulette pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the roulette notice effect designation command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 150 and the lamp / drive control unit 160, and processing for executing the roulette notice effect is performed.

In step S1443-12, the sub CPU 120a uses the reach notice determination table (see FIG. 38 (a)) to determine whether or not the reach notice effect is executed and the type of the reach notice effect to be executed. To determine. The details of the notice determination table during reach will be described later with reference to FIG. 38 (a).

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1443-13 whether or not the determined advance notice pattern is a advance notice pattern for executing the character group advance notice effect. If it is a notice pattern that executes the character group notice effect, the process is moved to step S1443-14, and if it is a notice pattern that does not execute the character group notice effect, the process is moved to step S1443-16.

The character group notice effect is a type of jackpot advance notice effect in which one of a plurality of types of characters having different jackpot expectations is displayed as a group on the image display device 31.

In step S1443-14, the sub CPU 120a determines the character group pattern, which is the production mode of the character group notice effect, using the character group pattern determination table (see FIG. 38 (b)), and sets the character group pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. set. Details of this character group pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 38 (b).

In step S1443-15, the sub CPU 120a sets the character group advance notice effect designation command corresponding to the determined character group pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the character group notice effect designation command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 150 and the lamp / drive control unit 160, and the character group notice effect is executed.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1443-16 whether or not the determined advance notice pattern is a advance notice pattern for executing the decorative member advance notice effect. If it is a notice pattern for executing the decorative member notice effect, the process is moved to step S1443-17, and if it is not a notice pattern for executing the decorative member notice effect, the current jackpot notice effect determination process is terminated.

The decorative member notice effect is a kind of jackpot advance notice effect in which the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b are operated from the initial position to the operating position. Specifically, when the jackpot game is executed (higher expectation of jackpot) than when the jackpot game is not executed, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b operate from the initial position to the operating position. It is easy to increase the number of times to do it.

In step S1443-17, the sub CPU 120a determines the number of operations of the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b in the decorative member advance notice effect by using the decorative member operation number determination table (see FIG. 38C). And set it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the decorative member operation number determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 38 (c).

In step S1443-18, the sub CPU 120a sets the decorative member advance notice designation command according to the determined number of operations in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and ends the current jackpot advance notice effect determination process.

(Pre-reach notice decision table)
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a pre-reach advance notice determination table that is referred to when determining a pre-reach advance notice pattern. The pre-reach notice decision table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each notice pattern, and the notice pattern to be decided.

Pre-reach notice notice patterns include "no notice" where the pre-reach notice is not executed, "line notice effect" where the dialogue notice effect is executed, "step-up notice effect" where the step-up notice effect is executed, and roulette notice. There are four types of "roulette notice production" in which the production is executed, and the jackpot expectation is no notice <line notice production <roulette notice production <step-up notice production.

The feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 35 is that the pre-reach notice is easier to be executed and the jackpot expectation is low in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss in the big hit lottery result. It can be pointed out that the pre-reach advance notice is more likely to be executed when the fluctuation effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined than when it is determined. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.
The pre-reach notice shown in FIG. 35 is only an example, and may include a pre-reach notice (not shown).

(Serif pattern determination table)
FIG. 36A is a diagram showing a dialogue pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a dialogue pattern. The dialogue pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each dialogue pattern, and the dialogue pattern to be determined.

In the dialogue pattern, "normal dialogue" in which it is unknown whether or not a jackpot game may be executed, "reach confirmed dialogue" in which reach production is confirmed, and reach production may be executed. There are four categories, "Expectation UP dialogue" that suggests that the jackpot game may be executed, and "Probability dialogue (premier)" that confirms that the jackpot will be a big hit. A plurality of lines are set in, and the jackpot expectation is normal line <reach confirmed line <expectation UP line <probable line (big hit confirmed).

As a feature of the dialogue pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36 (a), the jackpot lottery result is more than the reach confirmed dialogue (reach confirmed dialogue, expectation UP dialogue, correctness) than when the jackpot lottery result is lost. It is easier to determine the dialogue), and the dialogue (reach) that is higher than the reach confirmed dialogue is more likely to be determined when the fluctuation production pattern with high jackpot expectation is determined than when the fluctuation production pattern with low jackpot expectation is determined. There is a point that it is easy to determine the definite dialogue, the expectation degree UP dialogue, and the correct dialogue). By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Step-up pattern determination table)
FIG. 36B is a diagram showing a step-up pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a step-up pattern. The step-up pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each step-up pattern, and the determined step-up pattern.

The step-up pattern includes "normal SU1" in which the first step effect is executed, "normal SU2" in which the first and second step effects are executed, and "normal SU2" in which the first to third step effects are executed. "SU3", "normal SU4" in which the first to fourth step effects are executed, "normal SU5" in which the first to fifth step effects are executed, and the jackpot game in which the first to fifth step effects are executed Six types of "winning SU5 (premier)" that are confirmed to be executed are set, and the jackpot expectation is normal SU1 <normal SU2 <normal SU3 <normal SU4 <normal SU5 <winning SU5.

As a feature of the step-up pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36 (b), it is easier to determine the step-up pattern in which the number of executions of the step effect is larger in the case of the jackpot than in the case of the jackpot lottery result being lost, and the jackpot The point that the step-up pattern with a large number of executions of the step effect is more likely to be determined when the variation effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined than when the variation effect pattern with a low expectation is determined. Can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Roulette pattern determination table)
FIG. 37 (c) is a diagram showing a roulette pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the roulette pattern and the selection icon. The roulette pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each roulette pattern, the determined roulette pattern, and the selection icon.

The roulette pattern includes "roulette pattern 1" consisting of "x", "?", "SP", "heat", and "rainbow" selection icons, and "?", "SP", "heat", selection icons. Two types of "roulette pattern 2" consisting of "super heat" and "rainbow" are set, and the jackpot expectation is roulette pattern 1 <roulette pattern 2.

As a feature of the roulette pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 (c), the roulette pattern 2 is more likely to be determined in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery result, and a variable effect pattern with a low expectation of a jackpot is obtained. There is a point that selection icons such as "super heat" and "rainbow" are more likely to be selected when a variable effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined than when it is determined. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Notice decision table during reach)
FIG. 38 (a) is a diagram showing a reach notice determination table that is referred to when determining a notice pattern for the notice during reach. The notice lottery result during reach, the variable effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each notice pattern, and the notice pattern to be decided are associated with each other.

The notice patterns of the notice during reach include "no notice" in which the notice during reach is not executed, "character group notice effect" in which the character group notice effect is executed, and "decorative member notice effect" in which the decorative member notice effect is executed. Three types are set, and the jackpot expectation is no notice <decorative member notice production <character group notice production.

The features of the reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 38 (a) are that the reach notice (character group notice effect) is more likely to be executed in the case of a big hit than in the case where the big hit lottery result is lost. The point that the notice during reach (character group notice production) is easier to be executed when the fluctuation production pattern with high jackpot expectation is determined than when the fluctuation production pattern with low jackpot expectation is determined. Can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.
It should be noted that the notice during reach shown in FIG. 38 is merely an example, and may include a notice during reach (not shown).

(Character group pattern determination table)
FIG. 38B is a diagram showing a character group pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a character group pattern. The character group pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each character group pattern, and the determined character group pattern.

The character group pattern includes a "first character group" in which the first character group is displayed, a "second character group" in which the second character group is displayed, and a "third character group" in which the third character group is displayed. , 4 types of "4th character group (premier)" that the 4th character group is displayed and the jackpot is confirmed are set, and the jackpot expectation is 1st character group <2nd character group < The 3rd character group <4th character group (big hit confirmed).

A feature of the character group pattern determination table shown in FIG. 38 (b) is that it is determined that a variable effect pattern equal to or higher than the SP reach effect is executed when the character group notice effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the character group notice effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Decorative member operation count determination table)
FIG. 38 (c) is a diagram showing a decorative member operation number determination table referred to when determining the number of times to operate the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b. The number of operations of the decorative member operation number determination table is associated with the number of operations for each variation effect pattern.
For example, "1" is associated with the variable effect pattern that finally executes the SP reach effect, and "1" is associated with the variable effect pattern that finally executes the SP reach effect. "Or" 2 "is associated with each other, and" 3 "is associated with the number of operations of the variable effect pattern that finally executes the full rotation reach effect.
In the variable effect pattern in which the SPSP reach effect is finally executed, it is easier to select the number of operations "1" when the player loses, and it is easier to select the number of operations "2" when the player hits the jackpot.
That is, the expected degree of jackpot is 1 operation count <2 operation counts <3 operation counts (big hit confirmation).

The feature of the decorative member operation number determination table shown in FIG. 38 (c) is that, for example, if the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b operate once at the start of fluctuation or during normal reach, the SP reach effect or more is achieved. It can be confirmed that the variable effect pattern is executed. Further, if the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b are operated three times, the jackpot can be confirmed. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the decorative member advance notice effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the overall control unit 151)
The main process of the integrated control unit 151 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the integrated control unit 151.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 140, a system reset occurs in the control CPU 152, and the control CPU 152 performs the following main processing.

First, the integrated CPU 152 sets interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interruption in step T1, and performs initialization processing in step T2. In this process, the control CPU 152 reads the main processing program from the control ROM 153, initializes the flags and the like stored in the control RAM 154, and performs processing such as initial setting.

In step T3, the centralized CPU 152 sets interrupt permission for permitting timer interrupts, and in step T4, determines whether or not an effect instruction command is received from the effect control unit 120 m with reference to the receive buffer of the integrated RAM 154. If it is determined and not received (step T4: No), the process is transferred to step T7, and if it is received (step T4: Yes), it corresponds to the received effect instruction command in step T5. Performs the animation pattern setting process that determines and sets the animation pattern from the types of animation groups. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

Examples of the effect instruction command include a customer waiting effect command, an icon display command, a change effect command, a variable effect pattern command, a symbol stop pattern command, an opening effect pattern command, a round effect pattern command, and an ending effect pattern command.

The animation group is the type of object that constitutes the production image, the scene (timing) and weight frame (display time) at which the production image is displayed, the target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns that are information that specifies (designates) parameters (display position of sprite image, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information that specifies the image display device that displays the production image, etc. are bundled. It is a group formed by being done.

The types of animation groups include, for example, an effect symbol group for displaying the animation of the effect symbol 38, an icon group for displaying the hold icon and the animation of the variable icon, and an animation of the variable effect such as a background and a character. Examples include a variable effect group for displaying a notice effect group for displaying an animation such as a notice, a special game effect group for displaying an animation of a special game effect, and the like.

In step T6, the general CPU 152 performs a sound setting process of determining and setting a sound pattern from a type of sound group corresponding to the received effect instruction command, and in step T7, updates the effect image to be displayed on the image display device. It is determined whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is the frame update timing (drawing a new effect image), and if there is no frame switching flag (step T7: No), processing is performed in step T4. If there is a frame switching flag (step T7: Yes), the frame switching flag is cleared in step T8.

In step T9, the general CPU 152 generates a display list composed of drawing control command groups, and performs display list generation / output processing for outputting the generated display list to the image control unit 155.

Here, the display list is image shaping information for molding an effect image to be displayed on the image display device 31, and is generated for each frame of one unit or a plurality of units (frame update timing). , In the present embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each animation pattern set in the animation control process described later, a drawing control command is set for each set animation pattern according to the contents of the animation scene information. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current number of frames is generated. The drawing control commands are sequentially set from the animation pattern of the animation group having the lowest priority to the animation pattern of the animation group having the highest priority according to the priority (drawing order) set to the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs. However, the reverse is also possible.

In step T10, the control CPU 152 performs drawing command processing for instructing the image control unit 155 to draw an effect image based on the output list. By performing this drawing command processing, the image control unit 155 draws an effect image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and displays the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer on the image display device 31. I do.

In step T11, the general CPU 152 generates a sound list composed of sound control command groups, and performs sound list generation / output processing for outputting the generated sound list to the voice control unit 158.

Here, the sound list is audio output information for designating sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 32, and is used when outputting a new sound. It is generated based on the drawing frame.

In step T12, the general CPU 152 performs sound output command processing for instructing the sound output based on the sound list output to the voice control unit 158. By performing this sound output command processing, the voice control unit 158 outputs a sound based on the sound list from the voice output device 32.

Therefore, various sounds are started to be output from the audio output device 32 so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 155, and the audio output device is synchronized (synchronized) with the frame update timing. The output from 32 is terminated.

The audio output device 32 starts outputting various sounds so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing, but the audio output device 32 outputs various sounds so as not to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing. May be stopped and vice versa.

In step T13, the general CPU 152 performs animation control processing for updating animation scene information (address) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then performs processing in step T4. After that, the processes from step T4 to step T13 are repeated so as to loop.

(Command reception interrupt processing of the overall control unit 151)
The command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 151 will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (a). FIG. 40A is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 151, and the command reception interrupt process is executed by receiving an effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 120 m.

In step T20, the control CPU 152 performs a command reception process for receiving the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 120 m. Specifically, a process of storing the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 120 m in the reception buffer of the control RAM 154 is performed. When this process is completed, the command reception interrupt process this time is completed.

(V blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit 151)
The V-blank interrupt process of the overall control unit 151 will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (b). FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing the V-blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit 151, and the V-blank interrupt processing ends the display of the effect image for one frame from the image control unit 155 (1/30). It is executed every time a V blank signal transmitted every second (second = about 33 ms) is received (1/30 second = about 33 ms).

In step T30, the general CPU 152 performs counter update processing for updating a predetermined number of counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) (for example, adding “1”), and in step T31, the image control unit 155 On the other hand, a frame buffer switching command process for instructing to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 157 is performed.

As a result, each time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 second (about 33 ms), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area become a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer". It will switch alternately to and.

In step T32, the general CPU 152 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and ends the current V blank interrupt processing. Since this frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processes of steps T8 to T13 are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Anime pattern setting process of integrated control unit 151)
The animation pattern setting process of the integrated control unit 151 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the animation pattern setting process of the integrated control unit 151.

First, in step T5-1, the general CPU 152 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a customer waiting effect command, and if it is not a customer waiting effect command (step T5-1: No), step T5. When the process is moved to -3 and the command is a customer waiting effect command (step T5-1: Yes), in step T5-2, a customer waiting animation pattern is generated from the customer waiting group for displaying the customer waiting animation. Performs the customer waiting animation pattern setting process that is determined and set.

In step T5-3, the general CPU 152 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an icon display pattern command, and if it is not an icon display pattern command (step T5-3: No), step T5-5. In the case of the icon display pattern command (step T5-3: Yes), in step T5-4, the icon animation pattern is displayed from the icon group for displaying the animation of the hold icon or the animation of the variable icon. Performs icon animation pattern setting processing to determine and set.

In step T5-5, the general CPU 152 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a variable effect pattern command, and if it is not a variable effect pattern command (step T5-5: No), step T5-7. In the case of the variable effect pattern command (step T5-5: Yes), in step T5-6, the variable effect animation pattern is transferred from the variable effect group for displaying the background animation and the character animation. Performs variable effect animation pattern setting processing that is determined and set.

In step T5-7, the general CPU 152 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a symbol stop pattern command, and if it is not a symbol stop pattern command (step T5-7: No), step T5-9. In the case of the symbol stop pattern command (step T5-7: Yes), in step T5-8, the animation of the production symbol or the animation of the design from the production symbol group for displaying the animation of the fourth symbol is performed. Performs the pattern animation pattern setting process to determine and set the pattern.

In step T5-9, the general CPU 152 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a notice effect pattern command, and if it is not a notice effect pattern command (step T5-9: No), step T5-11. In the case of the advance notice effect pattern command (step T5-9: Yes), in step T5-10, the advance notice effect group for displaying the advance notice effect that predicts that there is a possibility of a big hit. The advance notice effect animation pattern setting process is performed to determine and set the advance notice effect animation pattern from.

In step T5-11, the general CPU 152 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an operation promotion pattern command, and if it is not an operation promotion pattern command (step T5-11: No), step T5-13. In the case of the operation promotion pattern command (step T5-11: Yes), in step T5-12, the operation promotion group for displaying the operation promotion effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 35 is used to promote the operation. Operation promotion to determine and set an animation pattern Performs animation pattern setting processing.

In step T5-13, the general CPU 152 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an operation effect pattern command, and if it is not an operation effect pattern command (step T5-13: No), step T5-15. In the case of the operation effect pattern command (step T5-13: Yes), in step T5-14, the operation effect animation pattern is determined and set from the operation effect group for displaying the operation effect. Operation effect Performs animation pattern setting processing.

In step T5-15, the general CPU 152 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an opening effect pattern command, and if it is not an opening effect pattern command (step T5-15: No), step T5-17. In the case of the opening effect pattern command (step T5-15: Yes), in step T5-16, the opening effect animation pattern is determined and set from the opening effect group for displaying the opening effect. Opening production Performs animation pattern setting processing.

In step T5-17, the general CPU 152 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a round effect pattern command, and if it is not a round effect pattern command (step T5-17: No), step T5-19. In the case of a round effect pattern command (step T5-17: Yes), in step T5-18, the round effect animation pattern is determined and set from the round effect group for displaying the round effect. Round production Performs animation pattern setting processing.

In step T5-19, the general CPU 152 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an ending effect pattern command, and if it is not an ending effect pattern command (step T5-19: No), this animation pattern. When the setting process is completed and the ending effect pattern command is used (step T5-19: Yes), in step T5-20, the ending effect animation pattern is determined and set from the ending effect group for displaying the ending effect. The ending effect animation pattern determination process is performed, and the animation pattern setting process this time is completed.

Next, the first feature portion related to the specific image will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 46.

FIG. 42 is a time chart 1 showing details for each variation effect pattern (see FIG. 33), FIG. 42A shows the details of the variation effect pattern 1, and FIG. 42B shows the details of the variation effect pattern 5. (C) shows the details of the variation effect pattern 7.

In FIG. 42, “effect symbol (effect symbol 38)”, “small effect symbol (small effect symbol 38d)”, “holding symbol (held number image described above)”, and “specific image” displayed on the image display device 31. (Specific image 31e described later) ”is shown in detail for each variation effect pattern.

(Timing (a) T0)
(A) is the variation effect pattern 1, and the timing (a) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started. When the variable display is started, the "effect symbol" is scrolled in the vertical direction, and the player can visually recognize the scrolled display.
Further, at this time, the "effect symbol" is scrolled and displayed in the vertical direction in the first display mode.
The "first display mode" is a normal display mode (default display mode) of the "effect symbol", and is, for example, a display mode composed of a character symbol + a number symbol, as shown in FIG. 43 and the like. It is composed of the first component and the second component described above). In addition to the "first display mode", it has a "second display mode" (composed of the second component described above) composed of only numerical symbols, and the variation effect pattern 7 and the like described later may be used. , It is possible to change between the "first display mode" and the "second display mode" during the variable display.

Further, when the variable display is started, the "small effect symbol" is scrolled in the vertical direction, and the player can visually recognize the scrolled display.
It should be noted that the "small effect symbol" does not have a "first display mode" and a "second display mode" like the "effect symbol", and the display mode is unchanged regardless of any variable effect pattern. .. For example, as shown in FIG. 43 and the like, it is composed of only numerical symbols and is not attached with character symbols. Further, it is always displayed at the lower right of the display area of the image display device 31, and the display position does not change, the size does not change, and the color or design does not change during the variation effect.

Further, even when the variable display is started, the "reserved symbol" is displayed, and the player can visually recognize the displayed "reserved symbol".
For example, as shown in FIG. 43 and the like, “2” is displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 31c, which is the “second storage unit” of the first special symbol determination information reservation storage area in FIG. It shows that the first special figure determination information is stored up to. Further, "0" is displayed in the second special symbol reservation number display area 31d, which is displayed in the "first storage unit" to the "fourth storage unit" of the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area in FIG. It indicates that the second special figure determination information is not stored.
That is, the "holding symbol" can display any number of "0" to "4" in the first special symbol holding number display area 31c and the second special symbol holding number display area 31d, and is "0". Is displayed, either the special figure determination information is not stored in the "0th storage unit" or the special figure determination information is stored only in the "0th storage unit". "1" to "4" indicate a state in which special figure determination information is stored in the "first storage unit" to the "fourth storage unit", respectively.

Further, even if the variable display is started, the "specific image" is not displayed, and the player cannot visually recognize the "specific image". In the effect configuration column of FIG. 33, in the variable effect pattern including the "specific image", the "specific image" is displayed as "2S" immediately before the temporary stop display period is reached.

Then, these modes of "effect symbol", "small effect symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (a) T1.

(Timing (a) T1)
Timing (a) T1 is a timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the "temporary stop display period" is entered.
At that timing, the "effect symbol" can still be visually recognized in the "first display mode", but since the "temporary stop display period" is reached, the vertical scroll display is finished and the predetermined stop position is reached. It is possible to visually recognize the small shaking.

Further, at the timing, the "small effect symbol" continues to be visually scrolled in the vertical direction.
That is, the "small effect symbol" is not displayed by shaking slightly like the "effect symbol" in the "temporary stop display period", and is continuously scrolled in the vertical direction even in the "temporary stop display period". Is supposed to do.

In addition, at that timing, the "pending symbol" is still visible.
In addition, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed and cannot be visually recognized continuously (hereinafter, simply referred to as "not displayed").

Then, these modes of "effect symbol", "small effect symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (a) T2.

(Timing (a) T2)
Timing (a) T2 is a timing at which the “temporary stop display period” ends and the process shifts to the “fixed stop display period”.
At that timing, the "effect symbol" can still be visually recognized in the "first display mode", but since it is the "fixed stop display period", the display that sways slightly is finished, and it is completely at the predetermined stop position. It is possible to visually recognize the state of the stop display.

In addition, at the relevant timing, the "small effect symbol" is still visible, but since the "fixed stop display period" is reached, the vertical scroll display is finished and the "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed. It is possible to visually recognize how the "small effect symbol" composed of the symbols of is stopped and displayed at the same time.

In addition, at that timing, the "pending symbol" is still visible.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these modes of "directing symbol", "small directing symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (a) T3, and when the timing (a) T3 is reached, the variable effect is produced. Pattern 1 is finished (1 game is finished).

(Timing (b) T0)
(B) is the variation effect pattern 5, and each aspect of the "effect symbol", "small effect symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" of the "normal variation period" up to the timing (b) T1 is , Since it is the same as the “normal fluctuation period” of the fluctuation effect pattern 1 described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

(Timing (b) T1)
Timing (b) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the "normal reach fluctuation period" is entered.
At this timing, the "effect symbol" is still visible in the "first display mode", but since it is in the "normal reach fluctuation period", for example, the left effect symbol 38a and the right effect symbol 38c are the same character symbol. Temporary stop display is performed with a + number symbol, and it is possible to visually recognize how the middle effect symbol 38b is scrolled and displayed in the vertical direction (reach state).

Further, at the timing, the "small effect symbol" continues to be visually scrolled in the vertical direction.
That is, the "small effect symbol" does not form a reach state like the "effect symbol" in the "normal reach fluctuation period", but continues to be "left" and "middle" in the "normal reach fluctuation period". , The "right" symbol is scrolled vertically.

In addition, at that timing, the "pending symbol" is still visible.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these modes of "effect symbol", "small effect symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (b) T2.

(Timing (b) T2)
Timing (b) T2 is the timing at which the "normal reach fluctuation period" ends and the "temporary stop display period" is entered.
At that timing, the "directed symbol" is still visible in the "first display mode", but since it is the "temporary stop display period" after the "normal reach fluctuation period", the vertical scroll display is finished. For example, the appearance of the "5" symbol (left effect symbol 38a), the "6" symbol (middle effect symbol 38b), and the "5" symbol (right effect symbol 38c) swaying slightly at a predetermined stop position is visually recognized. It is possible.

In addition, each mode of "small effect symbol", "holding symbol", "specific image" in timing (b) T2, "temporary stop display period" from timing (b) T2 to timing (b) T3 " Each aspect of "directing symbol", "small directing symbol", "holding symbol", "specific image", timing (b) of "directing symbol", "small directing symbol", "holding symbol", "specific image" in T3 Each aspect, each aspect of "effect symbol", "small effect symbol", "holding symbol", "specific image" in "fixed stop display period" from timing (b) T3 to timing (b) T4 Since it is the same as the variation effect pattern 1 described above, the description thereof will be omitted.
Then, when the timing (b) T4 is reached, the variation effect pattern 5 ends (1 game ends).

(Timing (c) T0)
(C) is the variation effect pattern 7, which is the "effect symbol", "small effect symbol" of the "normal variation period" and the "normal reach variation period" from the timing (c) T1 to the timing (c) T2. Since each aspect of the "reserved symbol" and the "specific image" is the same as the "normal fluctuation period" and the "normal reach fluctuation period" of the variation effect pattern 5 described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

(Timing (c) T2)
Timing (c) T2 is a timing for shifting from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "SP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, the "effect pattern" forming the reach state becomes invisible due to the background image.
Examples of the background image include a whiteout image, a blackout image, and a shielding image (door image, sliding door image, etc.).

Further, at the timing, the "small effect symbol" continues to be visually scrolled in the vertical direction.
That is, the "small effect symbol" is not invisible like the "effect symbol" in the "background switching", and the scroll display in the vertical direction is continuously visible even in the "background switching". It has become like.

In addition, at that timing, the "pending symbol" is still visible.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these modes of "effect symbol", "small effect symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (c) T3.

(Timing (c) T3)
Timing (c) T3 is the timing for shifting to the “SP reach fluctuation period” after finishing the “background switching”.
At this timing, the "effect symbol" can be visually recognized in the "second display mode". In the "SP reach fluctuation period" and the "SPSP reach fluctuation period", the content of the reach effect (for example, the confrontation effect between character images) is mainly to be visually recognized by the player, so that the "second display mode" is used. In the above, only the numerical symbols are displayed, and the display size is also smaller than the reach state in the "first display mode" at the corners of the display area of the image display device 31.

Further, at the timing, the "small effect symbol" continues to be visually scrolled in the vertical direction.
As described above, the display mode of the "small effect symbol" does not change even when the "SP reach fluctuation period" is reached.

In addition, at that timing, the "pending symbol" is still visible.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these modes of "effect symbol", "small effect symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (c) T4.

(Timing (c) T4)
Timing (c) T4 is a timing for performing "loss notification" to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss in the "SP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, the "effect symbol" can be visually recognized in the "second display mode", and the scroll-displayed middle effect symbol 38b is a numerical symbol different from the left effect symbol 38a and the right effect symbol 38c. Temporary stop display will be performed at.

Further, at the timing, the "small effect symbol" continues to be visually scrolled in the vertical direction.
In addition, at that timing, the "pending symbol" is still visible.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these modes of "effect symbol", "small effect symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (c) T5.

(Timing (c) T5)
Timing (c) T5 is a timing for shifting from the “SP reach fluctuation period” to the “background switching” for switching from the “SP reach fluctuation period” to the “temporary stop display period” after the “SP reach fluctuation period” is completed.
At this timing, the "effect symbol" becomes invisible when a specific image is displayed.

Further, at the timing, the "small effect symbol" continues to be visually scrolled in the vertical direction.
In addition, at that timing, the "pending symbol" is still visible.
Further, at the timing, the "specific image" is displayed so as to be visible.
That is, in the "background switching" at the timing, the "specific image", the "small effect symbol", and the "reserved symbol" are visibly displayed in the display area of the image display device 31.

Then, these modes of "effect symbol", "small effect symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (c) T6.
The display time of the "specific image" from the timing (c) T5 to the timing (c) T6 is "2S".

(Timing (c) T6)
Timing (c) T6 is a timing for shifting to the “temporary stop display period” after finishing the “background switching”.
At that timing, by erasing the "specific image", the "effect symbol" can be visually recognized again in the "first display mode".

In addition, each mode of "small effect symbol", "holding symbol", "specific image" in timing (c) T6, "temporary stop display period" from timing (c) T6 to timing (c) T7 " Each aspect of "directing symbol", "small directing symbol", "holding symbol", "specific image", timing (c) of "directing symbol", "small directing symbol", "holding symbol", "specific image" in T7 Each aspect, each aspect of "effect symbol", "small effect symbol", "holding symbol", "specific image" in "fixed stop display period" from timing (c) T7 to timing (c) T8 Since it is the same as the variation effect pattern 1 described above, the description thereof will be omitted.
Then, when the timing (c) T8 is reached, the variation effect pattern 7 ends (1 game ends).

Next, in order to facilitate understanding of the time chart of FIG. 42, a supplementary explanation will be given using the animation of FIG. 43.
Note that FIG. 43 shows only the image display device 31 extracted, and the case of (b) variation effect pattern 5 in which the “specific image” is not displayed and the case of (c) variation effect in which the “specific image” is displayed are displayed. The case of pattern 7 is described.
In the animation of FIG. 43, only the main part of the time chart is shown.

(Display example in variable effect pattern 5)
(B) T1 to T2 correspond to the "normal reach fluctuation period".
That is, as the left effect symbol 38a, the "5" symbol (first display mode) consisting of the character symbol + number symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (slightly swaying), and as the right effect symbol 38c, from the character symbol + number symbol. The "5" symbol (first display mode) is temporarily stopped (slightly swaying), and the middle effect symbol 38b is scrolled in the vertical direction to form a reach state.

Further, as a background image, a background image imitating a mountain is displayed.
Further, in the lower left corner of the display area of the image display device 31, a first special symbol hold number display area 31c and a second special symbol hold number display area 31d are formed, and a hold number image is displayed.

Further, in the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 31, a small effect symbol 38d composed of "left", "middle", and "right" symbols is scrolled and displayed in the vertical direction.
Further, although not particularly mentioned in the time chart of FIG. 42, the variable icon display area 31a and the hold icon display area 31b are displayed, and the variable icon display area 31a has a hold icon in the shape of “○”. One "1" is displayed, and in the hold icon display area 31b, a "○" shaped hold icon is "2" so as to correspond to the hold number image "2" of the first special symbol hold number display area 31c. Is displayed.

(B) T2 to T3 correspond to the "temporary stop display period".
That is, as the left effect symbol 38a, the "5" symbol (first display mode) consisting of the character symbol + number symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (slightly swaying), and as the middle effect symbol 38b, from the character symbol + number symbol. The "6" symbol (first display mode) is temporarily stopped (slightly swaying), and the "5" symbol (first display mode) consisting of the character symbol + number symbol is temporarily stopped as the right effect symbol 38c. It is displayed (slightly shaking).
Since other display modes are the same as those in (b) T1 to T2, the description thereof will be omitted.

(B) T3 to T4 correspond to the "fixed stop display period".
That is, as the left effect symbol 38a, the "5" symbol (first display mode) consisting of the character symbol + number symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed (completely stopped), and as the middle effect symbol 38b, the character symbol + number symbol is displayed. The "6" symbol (first display mode) consisting of the character symbol (first display mode) is fixedly stopped and displayed (completely stopped), and the "5" symbol (first display mode) consisting of the character symbol + number symbol is displayed as the right effect symbol 38c. Confirmed stop is displayed (completely stopped).

In addition, a small effect symbol 38d composed of "left", "middle", and "right" symbols is simultaneously displayed as a fixed stop display at "5", "6", and "5".
Further, along with the fixed stop display, the hold icon in the shape of "○" is erased in the variable icon display area 31a.

(Display example in variable effect pattern 7)
(C) T4 to T5 correspond to "loss notification" in the "SP reach fluctuation period".
In the "loss notification", as an example, a state in which the ally character image is defeated by the enemy character image (confrontation effect) is displayed, and an image "losing" indicating that the defeat is displayed is displayed.
Further, as the left effect symbol 38a, the "5" symbol (second display mode) consisting only of the number symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed (slightly swaying), and as the right effect symbol 38c, the "5" consisting only of the number symbols. The symbol (second display mode) is temporarily stopped and displayed (slightly swaying), and the "6" symbol (second display mode) consisting of only numerical symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle effect symbol 38b.
The middle effect symbol 38b is displayed in the center of the display area in a display size larger than the display sizes of the left effect symbol 38a and the right effect symbol 38c.

Further, as the background image, the background image imitating the mountain displayed in the "normal reach fluctuation period" is not displayed, but the background image corresponding to the "confrontation effect" is displayed. As described above, in the "SP reach fluctuation period", a background image different from the background image displayed in the "normal fluctuation period" or the "normal reach fluctuation period" is displayed.
Further, in the lower left corner of the image display device 31, a first special symbol hold number display area 31c and a second special symbol hold number display area 31d are formed, and a hold number image is displayed.

Further, in the lower right corner of the image display device 31, a small effect symbol 38d composed of "left", "middle", and "right" symbols is scrolled and displayed in the vertical direction.
Further, although not particularly mentioned in the time chart of FIG. 42, the variable icon display area 31a and the hold icon display area 31b use the player's viewpoint as an SP reach effect in the “SP reach fluctuation period”. It is not displayed to point it. It should be noted that the display is not displayed from (c) T2 to (c) T6 in FIG. 42.
Even if the variable icon display area 31a and the hold icon display area 31b are hidden in this way, the hold number image is continuously displayed, so that the player can appropriately visually recognize the hold number image to obtain the hold status. Can be confirmed.

(C) T5 to T6 correspond to "background switching" after the "SP reach fluctuation period".
In the "background switching", the specific image 31e (an image imitating a shutter) is displayed over the entire display area.
With the display of the specific image 31e, the effect symbol 38 and the character image become invisible.
However, the reserved number image and the small effect symbol 38d are not shielded by the display of the specific image 31e, and can be visually recognized even while the specific image 31e is displayed.

(C) T6 to T7 correspond to the "temporary stop display period", and (c) T7 to T8 correspond to the "fixed stop display period", but the display contents are (b) T2 to T2. Since it is the same as the content described in T3, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the display mode of the effect pattern, the background image, or the like changes with the execution of the SP reach as in the variable effect pattern 7, (c) after the display of the specific image 31e shown in T5 to T6 is once sandwiched, By returning to the display mode before the execution of the SP reach, it is possible to switch the display mode so as not to give the player a sense of discomfort.
In addition, after the loss is notified by the SP reach, after displaying the specific image 31e, the display mode before the execution of the SP reach can be returned to clarify the break of the effect, and the reach effect (reach effect). It is possible to make the player clearly grasp that the SP reach) has been completed.

It should be noted that the effect symbols (numerical symbols) in (c) T4 to T5 before the specific image 31e is displayed and the effect symbols (numerical symbols) in (c) T6 to T7 after the specific image 31e is displayed. Part) has the following features.
That is, the left effect symbol 38a and the right effect symbol 38c have a larger display size after the specific image 31e is displayed than before the specific image 31e is displayed, and the middle effect symbol 38b is specified after the specific image 31e is displayed. The display size is smaller than that before the image 31e is displayed.
As a result, it is possible to clarify the points (what is displayed as the confrontation effect or the middle effect symbol 38b) that the player wants to see in the SP reach.
The display size is not limited to this, and can be changed arbitrarily. For example, the middle effect symbol 38b before the specific image 31e is displayed may have the same display size as the left effect symbol 38a and the right effect symbol 38c.

Next, using FIG. 44, an effect example (effect symbol 38) that can be executed in the variable effect pattern in which the “specific image” is not displayed but cannot be executed in the variable effect pattern in which the “specific image” is displayed is used. Predetermined production) will be described.
In FIG. 44, only the image display device 31 is extracted and described, and the variation effect pattern 1 as the variation effect pattern in which the "specific image" is not displayed is varied as the variation effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed. The effect pattern 7 is described as an example.
In the animation of FIG. 44, only the main part of the time chart is shown.

(Display example in variable effect pattern 1)
(A) T0 to T1 correspond to the "normal fluctuation period".
That is, the left effect symbol 38a, the middle effect symbol 38b, and the right effect symbol 38c are scrolled in the vertical direction.
Since the other display elements (holding number images, etc.) are the same as those described in FIG. 43, the description thereof will be omitted.

(A) T1 to T2 correspond to the "temporary stop display period".
In this "temporary stop display period", the character symbols constituting the effect symbol 38 operate.
Specifically, each character symbol of the left effect symbol 38a, the middle effect symbol 38b, and the right effect symbol 38c raises both hands up, and then lowers both hands, and so on.
By performing such an operation, it is possible to give a change to the normal fluctuation (variation effect pattern 1), which has little change, which leads to an improvement in the interest of the game.

(A) T2 to T3 correspond to the "fixed stop display period".
Since the display mode in the "fixed stop display period" is the same as that described in FIG. 43, the description thereof will be omitted.
In this way, in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is not displayed, the motion effect by the character symbol can be executed in the "temporary stop display period".

(Display example in variable effect pattern 7)
The display example in the variation effect pattern 7 of (c) T4 to T5, (c) T5 to T6, (c) T6 to T7, and (c) T7 to T8 in FIG. 44 is the same as the content described in FIG. 43. Therefore, although the description is omitted, in (c) the "temporary stop display period" of T6 to T7, the operation effect by the character symbols constituting the effect symbol 38 as described in the above-mentioned variation effect pattern 1 is not performed. ..
As described above, in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed, the motion effect by the character symbol cannot be executed in the "temporary stop display period".
As a result, even though the player is made to clearly understand that the reach effect (SP reach) has been completed by displaying the specific image 31e, the motion effect by the character symbol is executed in the "temporary stop display period". This makes it possible to prevent the user from thinking that the reach production (SP reach) is continuing.

The effect using the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period" is not limited to the operation effect, and may be another effect.
For example, a so-called "chance eye" effect in which the effect symbol 38 is temporarily stopped and displayed with different numbers such as "3" symbol, "4" symbol, and "5" symbol, and then developed into a reach effect. When mounted, the effect may be such that the effect symbol 38 is highlighted (added with a predetermined effect image) in the "temporary stop display period".
That is, in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed, it may be possible to execute an effect that highlights such an effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period".

Further, for example, the effect symbol 38 is displayed as a fixed stop display continuously over a plurality of fluctuations by combining odd symbols such as "3" symbol, "5" symbol, and "7" symbol, and a big hit in the fluctuation after the plurality of fluctuations. In the case of mounting a look-ahead effect that is expected to be given, the effect may be such that the effect symbol 38 is color-displayed (a predetermined color image is added) in the "temporary stop display period".
That is, in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed, it may be possible to execute such an effect of displaying the effect symbol 38 in color during the "temporary stop display period".
In the production, when the combination of symbols is continuously fixedly stopped and displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, the combination of the symbols is not limited to the combination of odd-numbered symbols, but may be a combination of even-numbered symbols, or the combination of "3" symbols. A combination in which the symbols are arranged in order, such as "4" symbol and "5" symbol, may be used.
In addition, by turning off the effect symbol 38 (by making it dark), an effect suggesting a shift to SP reach or the like may be used.

Next, the display mode of the "specific image" for each gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 45.
Note that FIG. 45 shows only the image display device 31 extracted, and in the case where the variation effect pattern 7 is executed in the “normal game state” (normal) and in the “high probability game state” (high probability). The case where the variation effect pattern 7 is executed is described.
In the animation of FIG. 45, only the main part of the time chart is shown.

(Display example in the fluctuation effect pattern 7 of the normal game state)
The display example in the variation effect pattern 7 of (c) T4 to T5 (normal), (c) T5 to T6 (normal), (c) T6 to T7 (normal), and (c) T7 to T8 (normal) is shown in FIG. Since it is the same as the content described in 43, the description thereof will be omitted.

(Display example in the fluctuation effect pattern 7 of the high-probability gaming state)
(C) T4 to T5 (high probability) correspond to "loss notification" in the "SP reach fluctuation period".
(C) T4 to T5 (high probability) are "RUSH medium image 31f" indicating that they are in a high probability gaming state as compared with (c) T4 to T5 (normal), and in the high probability gaming state, It differs in that "right-handed image 31g" indicating that right-handed hitting is performed is further displayed, and other display modes are common, but the game state of the reserved number image and the small effect symbol 38d changes. Even so, the display mode (design, size, etc.) remains unchanged.

(C) T5 to T6 (high probability) correspond to "background switching" after the "SP reach fluctuation period".
For (c) T5 to T6 (high probability), a specific image 31e composed of the same image as (c) T5 to T6 (normal) is displayed. However, the "RUSH medium image 31f" and the "right-handed image 31g" are displayed so as to overlap the front side of the specific image 31e.
In this way, the information essential in the gaming state (RUSH medium image 31f, right-handed image 31g) is displayed, but the specific image 31e itself uses the same information as in the normal gaming state.
As a result, it is not necessary to prepare the specific image 31e for the normal gaming state and for the high-probability gaming state, respectively, which leads to a reduction in the used area of the CGROM 156.

(C) T6 to T7 (high probability) correspond to the "temporary stop display period".
In the high-probability gaming state, the effect symbol 38 remains in the "second display mode" even in the "temporary stop display period", and the same applies to the subsequent "fixed stop display period".
That is, in the high-probability gaming state, the effect symbol 38 is always in the "second display mode".
In addition, a continuous jackpot number image 31h (an image of "3 wins") showing the number of consecutive jackpots (so-called consecutive chan counts) is displayed.
In addition, a background image imitating the night indicating that the game is in a high-probability gaming state is displayed.
Since the other display elements (holding number images, etc.) are the same as those described in FIG. 43, the description thereof will be omitted.

(C) T7 to T8 (high probability) correspond to the "fixed stop display period".
Compared to (c) T7 to T8 (normal), (c) T7 to T8 (high probability) includes a background image at night, a RUSH medium image 31f indicating that the game is in a high probability game state, and a high probability game. It differs in that the right-handed image 31 g indicating that right-handed hitting is performed in the state, the continuous jackpot count image 31h, and the effect symbol 38 of the "second display mode" are displayed, and the other display modes are common. Is.

Although the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state have been described as examples in FIG. 45, a common specific image 31e may be displayed even in the time-saving gaming state.
As a result, the common specific image 31e can be used in the normal gaming state, the high-probability gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state, which leads to a reduction in the used area of the CGROM 156.
Although the specific image 31e common to the time-saving game state and the high-probability game state is displayed, another specific image 31e (with a different design) may be displayed in the normal game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a display mode of the “specific image” for each mode will be described.
Note that FIG. 46 shows only the image display device 31 extracted, and shows a case where the variation effect pattern 7 is executed in mode A in the “normal game state” (normal) and a “normal game state” (normal). The case where the variation effect pattern 7 is executed in the mode B in the above is described.
In the animation of FIG. 46, only the main part of the time chart is shown.

The mode is switched every predetermined number of fluctuations or every time the reach effect is executed so as not to cause the player to get bored. Depending on the mode, the background image, the mode of the character symbol of the effect symbol 38, and the mode may be changed. The mode of the hold icon is different.
For example, in mode A, a background image imitating a mountain is displayed, but in mode B, a background image imitating the sea is displayed.
In the present embodiment, for convenience, the description uses modes A and B, but a plurality of modes may be further provided.
The mode is synonymous with the so-called "stage (directing stage)".
Further, the mode may be switched (shifted to another mode) by the operation of the effect button 35 of the player.

(Display example in the variation effect pattern 7 of the normal game state mode A)
Table in the variation effect pattern 7 of (c) T4 to T5 (mode A), (c) T5 to T6 (mode A), (c) T6 to T7 (mode A), (c) T7 to T8 (mode A). Since the illustration is the same as that described in FIG. 43, the description thereof will be omitted, but only in (c) T6 to T7 (mode A), the "mode A image 31j" indicating the mode A is displayed. It's different.

(Display example in the variation effect pattern 7 of the normal game state mode B)
Since the display examples in the variation effect pattern 7 of (c) T4 to T5 (mode B) and (c) T5 to T6 (mode B) are the same as those described in FIG. 43, the description thereof will be omitted.

(C) T6 to T7 (mode B) correspond to the "temporary stop display period".
Compared to (c) T6 to T7 (mode A), (c) T6 to T7 (mode B) displays a background image imitating the sea, and the character symbols constituting the effect design 38 also have the concept of the sea. It has become a design.
Further, the "mode B image 31k" indicating the mode B is displayed. Further, the icon displayed in the variable icon display area 31a and the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 31b are also different from the mode A. It has a design (diamond).
The display mode (design, size, etc.) of the reserved number image and the small effect symbol 38d is the same as that of the mode A. That is, even if the mode changes, the display mode does not change.

(C) T7 to T8 (mode B) correspond to the "fixed stop display period".
That is, the effect symbol 38 in the mode B is displayed as a fixed stop (completely stopped).

In this way, while preventing the player from getting bored by making the background image or the like different depending on the mode, using a specific image 31e common to all modes leads to a reduction in the used area of the CGROM 156.

In FIG. 46, the mode A in the normal gaming state and the mode B in the normal gaming state have been described, but even when there are a plurality of modes in the time-saving gaming state or the high-probability gaming state, FIG. 46 The contents of can be applied.

A specific image 31e common to the mode A and the mode B is displayed, and a specific image 31e common to the mode C and the mode D (a specific image having a different design from the specific image 31e displayed in the mode A and the mode B). 31e) may be displayed.

It should be noted that the gaming state in which FIGS. 42 to 46 are executed does not matter. For example, it may be applied in all gaming states or in some gaming states.

In FIGS. 42 to 46, the display mode of the effect symbol 38 was changed before and after the display of the specific image 31e, but it does not have to be changed.
Further, in FIGS. 42 to 46, the display mode of the small effect symbol 38d was not changed before and after the display of the specific image 31e, but it may be changed.

(Summary of FIGS. 42 to 46)
That is, FIGS. 42 to 46 have the following features.

That is,
While displaying the specific image 31e (for example, (c) T5 to T6 in FIG. 43),
Small effect design 38d → Displayed visually.
After displaying the specific image 31e (for example, (c) T6 to T7 in FIG. 43),
Small effect design 38d → Displayed visually.
Directional design 38 → Displayed visually.
There is such a feature.
As a result, the break of the effect can be clarified by the specific image 31e, and the player can clearly grasp that the reach effect (SP reach) has been completed.
Further, by making the effect symbol 38 invisible during the display of the specific image 31e, the player can clearly grasp that the reach effect (SP reach) has been completed.
Further, during the display of the specific image 31e, even if the effect symbol 38 is invisible, at least the small effect symbol 38d is visibly displayed, so that the fluctuation state can be confirmed.
Further, while the specific image 31e is being displayed, not only the small effect symbol 38d but also the reserved number image is visually displayed, so that the fluctuation status can be confirmed by the update status of the reserved number image.
Further, since the effect symbol 38 changes from the "second display mode" to the "first display mode" before the display of the specific image 31e and after the display of the specific image 31e, it is visually recognized during the display of the specific image 31e. By changing the display of the specific image 31e so as to be impossible, it is possible to switch the display mode so as not to give the player a sense of discomfort.

That is,
Before (for example, (c) T4 to T5 in FIG. 43) and after (for example, (c) T7 to T8 in FIG. 43) the specific image 31e is displayed,
Display mode of small effect symbol 38d → No change.
The display mode of the effect symbol 38 changes from the second display mode (for example, a display mode composed of only numbers) to the first display mode (for example, a display mode composed of numbers + characters).
There is such a feature.
As a result, for example, the effect symbol 38 having a large display size, which the player is gazing at, changes through the display of the specific image 31e. Therefore, the display of the specific image 31e indicates that the reach effect (SP reach) has ended. It is possible to make the player clearly grasp.

That is,
In the variation effect pattern (for example, variation effect pattern 7) accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e,
During the temporary stop display period
Effect Using the effect symbol 38 (for example, operation effect using the character symbol) → Do not execute.
In the variation effect pattern (for example, variation effect pattern 1) that does not involve the display of the specific image 31e,
During the temporary stop display period
An effect using the effect symbol 38 (for example, an operation effect using a character symbol) → can be executed.
There is such a feature.
As a result, it is possible to give a change to the variation effect pattern 1 which is scarcely changed without displaying the specific image 31e, which leads to the improvement of the game entertainment.
Further, in the variable effect pattern 7 accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e, the display of the specific image 31e makes the player clearly understand that the reach effect (SP reach) has ended, but the "temporary stop display" is displayed. It is possible to prevent the person from thinking that the reach effect (SP reach) is continuing by executing the motion effect by the character symbol in the "period".

That is,
Before (for example, (c) T4 to T5 in FIG. 43) and after (for example, (c) T7 to T8 in FIG. 43) the specific image 31e is displayed,
Hold quantity Image display mode → Does not change (for example, size, design, etc. do not change).
The display mode of the effect symbol 38 changes (for example, it changes from the second display mode composed of only numbers to the first display mode composed of numbers + characters).
There is such a feature.
As a result, the break of the effect can be clarified by the specific image 31e, and the player can clearly grasp that the reach effect (SP reach) has been completed.
Further, by making the effect symbol 38 invisible during the display of the specific image 31e, the player can clearly grasp that the reach effect (SP reach) has been completed.
Further, during the display of the specific image 31e, even if the effect symbol 38 is invisible, at least the reserved number images are displayed so that the fluctuation status can be confirmed.
Further, while the specific image 31e is being displayed, not only the reserved number image but also the small effect symbol 38d is visually displayed, so that the fluctuation status can be confirmed by the small effect symbol 38d.
Further, since the effect symbol 38 changes from the "second display mode" to the "first display mode" before the display of the specific image 31e and after the display of the specific image 31e, it is visually recognized during the display of the specific image 31e. By changing the display of the specific image 31e so as to be impossible, it is possible to switch the display mode so as not to give the player a sense of discomfort.

That is,
For example, when the variation effect pattern 7 is executed in the normal game state,
The specific image 31e (for example, (c) T5 to T6 (normal) in FIG. 45) is displayed.
And
The specific image 31e is
It can be displayed even in a specific gaming state (for example, a high-probability gaming state, a time-saving gaming state) (for example, (c) T5 to T6 (high probability) in FIG. 45).
There is such a feature.
As a result, it is not necessary to prepare the specific image 31e for each game state, which leads to a reduction in the used area of the CGROM 156.

That is,
When, for example, the variation effect pattern 7 is executed in the first mode,
The specific image 31e (for example, (c) T5 to T6 (mode A) in FIG. 46) is displayed.
And
The specific image 31e is
It can also be displayed in the second mode (for example, (c) T5 to T6 (mode B) in FIG. 46).
There is such a feature.
As a result, it is not necessary to prepare the specific image 31e for each mode, which leads to a reduction in the used area of the CGROM 156.

Next, the second feature portion related to the specific image will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51.
It should be noted that although some of FIGS. 47 to 51 omit the description because they mainly refer to the “sound” during the fluctuation effect, the contents described in FIGS. 42 to 46 may be combined as appropriate. Can be used.

FIG. 47 shows a musical composition in the variable effect pattern. For example, in the case of the variable effect pattern 1, "music A" is output from the audio output device 32 when the variable effect pattern 1 is executed. Indicates that the number of songs is "one" of "song A".
Further, in the case of the variable effect pattern 5, the "musical piece A" is output from the audio output device 32 while the variable effect pattern 5 is being executed, and then the "musical piece B" is output from the audio output device 32. Indicates that the number of songs is "two" of "song A" and "song B".
Since the same idea applies to other variable effect patterns, the description of other variable effect patterns will be omitted, but the overall tendency is that the variable effect pattern in which the reach effect is not executed is performing the variable effect. The number (types) of songs output to is small, and the more the variation effect pattern in which the reach effect is executed, the larger the number (types) of songs output during the execution of the variation effect, and further, the variation in which the reach effect is executed. Even in the production pattern, the number (types) of songs output during the execution of the variable production tends to increase, such as normal reach <SP reach ≒ SPSP reach.
Regarding "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", "Music D", "Music E", and "Music at the time of resurrection" shown in FIG. 47, even if the music is composed only of a melody. Alternatively, the music may consist of a melody and lyrics. However, if the first half of the variable production pattern is composed of only the melody and the latter half of the variable production pattern is composed of the melody + lyrics, it is possible to improve the expectation that the jackpot game will be executed. Therefore, for example, it is desirable to compose "song A" and "song B" only with a melody, and to compose "song C", "song D", "song E", and "song at the time of resurrection" with melody + lyrics. .. As a result, it is possible to improve the expectation that the jackpot game will be executed depending on the composition of the music.

FIG. 48 is a time chart 2 showing details for each variation effect pattern (see FIG. 33), FIG. 48A shows details of variation effect pattern 1, and FIG. 48B shows details of variation effect pattern 5. (C) shows the details of the variation effect pattern 7, and (d) shows the details of the variation effect pattern 16.
Further, the details of the relationship between the "specific image" displayed on the image display device 31 and the BGM (musical piece) output from the audio output device 32 and the stop sound are shown for each variation effect pattern.

(Timing (a) T0)
(A) is the variation effect pattern 1, and the timing (a) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started. When the variable display is started, the audio output device 32 outputs "music A".
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (a) T1.

(Timing (a) T1)
Timing (a) T1 is a timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the "temporary stop display period" is entered.
At that timing, "Music A" is still being output.
Further, at the timing, the "stop sound" is output from the voice output device 32.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (a) T2.

(Timing (a) T2)
Timing (a) T2 is a timing at which the “temporary stop display period” ends and the process shifts to the “fixed stop display period”.
At that timing, "Music A" is still being output.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output. That is, the "stop sound" is a sound output during the temporary stop display period.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (a) T3, and when the timing (a) T3 is reached, the variation effect pattern 1 ends (1). The game will end).

(Timing (b) T0)
(B) is the variation effect pattern 5, and timing (b) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started. When the variable display is started, the audio output device 32 outputs "music A".
Further, at that timing, "music B" is not output.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (b) T1.

(Timing (b) T1)
Timing (b) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the "normal reach fluctuation period" is entered.
At that timing, "music A" is not output.
Further, at that timing, "music B" is output. That is, it will be changed to a song accompanying the execution of normal reach.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (b) T2.

(Timing (b) T2)
Timing (b) T2 is the timing at which the "normal reach fluctuation period" ends and the "temporary stop display period" is entered.
At that timing, "music A" is output.
Further, at that timing, "music B" is not output. That is, with the end of the normal reach, the music accompanying the execution of the normal reach ends.
Further, at the timing, the "stop sound" is output from the voice output device 32.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (b) T3.

(Timing (b) T3)
Timing (b) T3 is a timing at which the “temporary stop display period” ends and the process shifts to the “fixed stop display period”.
At that timing, "Music A" is still being output.
Further, at that timing, "music B" is not output.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (b) T4, and when the timing (b) T4 is reached, the variation effect pattern. 5 is finished (1 game is finished).
In the variation effect pattern 5, the stop sound is output, but it may not be output. That is, in the variable effect pattern in which the reach effect or more is performed, the "stop sound" may not be output.

(Timing (c) T0)
(C) is the variation effect pattern 7, and timing (c) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started. When the variable display is started, the audio output device 32 outputs "music A".
Further, at that timing, "musical piece B" and "musical piece C" are not output.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T1.

(Timing (c) T1)
Timing (c) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the "normal reach fluctuation period" is entered.
At that timing, "music A" is not output.
Further, at that timing, "music B" is output. That is, it will be changed to a song accompanying the execution of normal reach.
Further, at that timing, "music C" is not output.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T2.

(Timing (c) T2)
Timing (c) T2 is a timing for shifting from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "SP reach fluctuation period".
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music C" are not output. That is, no music is output while the "background switching" is being performed.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T3.

(Timing (c) T3)
Timing (c) T3 is the timing for shifting to the “SP reach fluctuation period” after finishing the “background switching”.
At that timing, "music A" and "music B" are not output.
Further, at that timing, "music C" is output. That is, the music accompanying the execution of the SP reach is output.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T4.

(Timing (c) T4)
Timing (c) T4 is a timing for performing "loss notification" to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss in the "SP reach fluctuation period".
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music C" are not output. That is, by stopping all the songs, it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T5.

(Timing (c) T5)
Timing (c) T5 is a timing for shifting from the “SP reach fluctuation period” to the “background switching” for switching from the “SP reach fluctuation period” to the “temporary stop display period” after the “SP reach fluctuation period” is completed.
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music C" are not output.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at the timing, the "specific image" is displayed so as to be visible.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T6.
The display time of the "specific image" from the timing (c) T5 to the timing (c) T6 is "2S".

(Timing (c) T6)
Timing (c) T6 is a timing for shifting to the “temporary stop display period” after finishing the “background switching”.
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music C" are not output.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T7.

(Timing (c) T7)
Timing (c) T7 is a timing at which the “temporary stop display period” ends and the process shifts to the “fixed stop display period”.
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music C" are not output.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T8, and reach timing (c) T8. Then, the variation effect pattern 7 is finished (1 game is finished).

As shown in the above fluctuation effect pattern 7, the "background switching" period (first period) from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "SP reach fluctuation period" and the "SP reach fluctuation period" are completed and the "SP reach fluctuation period" is completed. The "background switching" period (second period) up to the "temporary stop display period" means that no music is output.
Note that the music is not output, it may mean that the music data is not output, or that the music data is output but the sound is not output from the audio output device 32. That is, any state may be used as long as the music is "inaudible" based on the player.
As a result, in the first period, when changing from the normal reach music to the SP reach music, it is possible to temporarily pause, so that it is possible to clearly recognize that the music has been changed.
Further, in the second period, the silence makes it possible to clearly recognize that the reach production has ended.
In addition, although silence was made in the first period and the second period, there may be a period in which silence is made in other periods.

Further, as shown by the variation effect pattern 7, the music (music A, music B, music C) can be output before the "specific image" is displayed, but the music is output after the "specific image" is displayed. do not.
That is, by outputting the music before the display based on the display of the "specific image", it is possible to improve the expectation for the big hit. On the other hand, by not outputting the music after the display, it is possible to prevent giving an excessive sense of expectation to the jackpot. In addition, by not outputting the music after the display, it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach production has ended.

(Timing (d) T0)
(D) is the variation effect pattern 16, and the timing (d) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started. When the variable display is started, the audio output device 32 outputs "music A".
Further, at that timing, "music B", "music C", and "music D" are not output.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "music D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (d) T1.

(Timing (d) T1)
The timing (d) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the "normal reach fluctuation period" is entered.
At that timing, "music A" is not output.
Further, at that timing, "music B" is output. That is, it will be changed to a song accompanying the execution of normal reach.
Further, at that timing, "musical piece C" and "musical piece D" are not output.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "music D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (d) T2.

(Timing (d) T2)
The timing (d) T2 is the timing for shifting from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "SP reach fluctuation period".
At that timing, "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", and "Music D" are not output. That is, no music is output while the "background switching" is being performed.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "music D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (d) T3.

(Timing (d) T3)
Timing (d) T3 is a timing for shifting to the “SP reach fluctuation period” after finishing the “background switching”.
At that timing, "music A" and "music B" are not output.
Further, at that timing, "music C" is output. That is, the music accompanying the execution of the SP reach is output.
Further, at that timing, "musical piece D" is not output.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "music D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (d) T4.

(Timing (d) T4)
The timing (d) T4 is the timing for shifting from the “SP reach fluctuation period” to the “background switching” for switching from the “SP reach fluctuation period” to the “SPSP reach fluctuation period” after the “SP reach fluctuation period” is completed.
At that timing, "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", and "Music D" are not output. That is, no music is output while the "background switching" is being performed.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "music D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (d) T5.

(Timing (d) T5)
The timing (d) T5 is the timing at which the “background switching” is completed and the “SPSP reach fluctuation period” is entered.
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music C" are not output.
Further, at that timing, "music D" is output. That is, the music accompanying the execution of SPSP reach is output.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "music D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (d) T6.

(Timing (d) T6)
Timing (d) T6 is a timing for performing "loss notification" to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss in the "SPSP reach fluctuation period".
At that timing, "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", and "Music D" are not output. That is, by stopping all the songs, it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "music D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (d) T7.

(Timing (d) T7)
The timing (d) T7 is the timing at which the “SPSP reach fluctuation period” ends and the transition to the “background switching” for switching from the “SPSP reach fluctuation period” to the “temporary stop display period”.
At that timing, "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", and "Music D" are not output.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at the timing, the "specific image" is displayed so as to be visible.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "music D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (d) T8.
The display time of the "specific image" from the timing (d) T7 to the timing (d) T8 is "2S".

(Timing (d) T8)
The timing (d) T8 is the timing at which the "background switching" is completed and the "temporary stop display period" is entered.
At that timing, "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", and "Music D" are not output.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "music D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (d) T9.

(Timing (d) T9)
Timing (d) T9 is a timing at which the “temporary stop display period” ends and the process shifts to the “fixed stop display period”.
At that timing, "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", and "Music D" are not output.
Further, at that timing, no "stop sound" is output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "music D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T10, and the timing (d) d) When T10 is reached, the variation effect pattern 16 ends (1 game ends).

That is, in the variable effect pattern 7 and the variable effect pattern 16, unlike the variable effect pattern 1 and the variable effect pattern 5, a "specific image" is displayed, and any music is output from the loss notification to the end of one game. There is no sound.
Further, even in the "temporary stop display period", the "stop sound" is not output.
For example, since the variation effect pattern 1 and the variation effect pattern 5 are selected frequently, they may be continuously executed over a plurality of variations. Therefore, it is necessary to clarify the break between fluctuations by outputting a "stop sound". On the other hand, since the variation effect pattern 7 and the variation effect pattern 16 are selected less frequently, they are rarely executed continuously over a plurality of variations. Therefore, even if the "stop sound" is not output, the break between the fluctuations becomes clear, so that the reason is that the fluctuation effect pattern 7 and the variation effect pattern 16 do not output the "stop sound".
Further, the variable effect pattern 1 and the variable effect pattern 5 are, for example, variable effect patterns in which the background image and the like during the variable effect are hardly changed, and are not the variable effect patterns in which the "specific image" is displayed. The break is not clear. In particular, since there is a high possibility that it will be executed continuously over a plurality of fluctuations, the breaks in the production will become even less clear.
Therefore, in such a variable effect pattern, the break of the effect can be clarified by outputting the "stop sound".
On the other hand, since the variable effect pattern 7 and the variable effect pattern 16 are, for example, variable effect patterns with abundant changes in the background image and the like during the variable effect, the breaks in the effect become clear to some extent due to the change in the background image and the like. There is no need to output a "stop sound" for a minute.
Further, since it is also a variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed, it is possible to play a role of displaying the "specific image" = notifying the break of the effect without outputting the "stop sound". In this way, it is possible to notify the break of a suitable effect according to the variable effect pattern.

Next, using the time chart 3 of FIG. 49, the characteristics of each variation effect pattern when the variation effect is finished (at the end of one game) and there is no subsequent hold will be described.
In FIG. 49, a comparison between the variable effect pattern 1 and the variable effect pattern 7 will be described.

In the case of the variation effect pattern 1, "hold 0" means that the special figure determination information is stored in the "0th storage unit" from (a) T0 to (a) T3. The special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to "fourth storage unit" (FIG. 12), and (a) T3 to "0th storage unit" and "first storage unit" to " It is shown that the special figure determination information is not stored in any of the "fourth storage units".
Similarly, in the case of the variation effect pattern 7, the special figure determination information is stored in the "0th storage unit" from (c) T0 to (c) T8, but the "first storage unit" to The special figure determination information is not stored in the "fourth storage unit" (FIG. 12), and (c) T8 ~ is the "0th storage unit", the "first storage unit" to the "fourth storage unit". It is shown that the special figure determination information is not stored in any of them.

Further, the "sound effect" is the SE described above, and is a sound different from the BGM (musical piece).
The "starting winning sound" is a sound output when a game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15 and the color of the hold icon is changed from the time of entering the ball. For example, when displaying the hold icon with the blue hold icon from the time of entering the ball, the "first start winning sound" is output, and when displaying the hold icon with the green hold icon from the time of entering the ball, "second" It is possible to output sounds according to the color, such as "starting winning sound" is output.
The "starting winning sound" is not limited to changing the color of the hold icon from the time of entering the ball, but is simply a sound notifying that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 14 or the second starting opening 15. (So-called winning notification sound) may be used.

The "panel lighting device" is a panel lighting device 34a (FIG. 4), and the "frame lighting device" is a frame lighting device 34b (FIG. 4).
Further, the "light emitting LV." Of these lighting devices indicates the brightness of each lighting device, and is intended to emit light brighter as the numerical value increases, such as LV1 <LV2 <LV3 <LV4 <LV5. ing. The brightness is, for example, LV1 and LV2, the number of LEDs to be lit does not change, but the brightness may be different depending on the intensity of light emission, or the brightness may be different by making the number of LEDs to be lit different. You may let me.
The brightness of LV5 is the brightness selected when various errors shown in FIG. 71, which will be described later, have occurred.

(Timing (a) T0)
(A) is the variation effect pattern 1, and the timing (a) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started. When the variable display is started, the audio output device 32 outputs "music A".
Further, at the timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to the "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), and the special figure determination information is stored only in the "0th storage unit". Is remembered.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "hold 0", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (a) T1.

(Timing (a) T1)
Timing (a) T1 is a timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the "temporary stop display period" is entered.
At that timing, "Music A" is still being output.
Further, at the timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to the "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), and the special figure determination information is stored only in the "0th storage unit". Is remembered.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "hold 0", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (a) T2.

(Timing (a) T2)
Timing (a) T2 is a timing at which the “temporary stop display period” ends and the process shifts to the “fixed stop display period”.
At that timing, "Music A" is still being output.
Further, at the relevant timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to the "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), but is stored in the "0th storage unit". The figure judgment information is deleted.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "hold 0", and "specific image" are continued until the timing (a) T3, and when the timing (a) T3 is reached, the variation effect pattern 1 ends (1). The game will end).

(Timing (a) T3)
Timing (a) T3 is a timing for shifting to the “customer waiting waiting period” (customer waiting state) after ending the “fixed stop display period”.
At that timing, "Music A" is still being output.
Further, at the timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to the "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), and the special figure determination information is also stored in the "0th storage unit". Is not remembered.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "hold 0", and "specific image" are continued for "10S" until the timing (a) T4.
That is, when the variation effect is finished (at the end of one game), if there is no subsequent hold, and the variation effect pattern executed immediately before is the variation effect pattern 1, after the "fixed stop display period" is finished. Even during the "customer waiting waiting period" of, the "music A" that was output during the execution of the variation effect pattern 1 continues to be output.
As a result, it is possible to give a feeling that the variable effect is continuing even during the "waiting period for customers", which leads to an improvement in the interest of the game.
It should be noted that the variable effect pattern in which the music continues to be output even during the “customer waiting period” is not limited to the variable effect pattern 1. For example, if it is a variation effect pattern in FIG. 33 in which the "specific image" is not displayed due to loss, it may be executed.

(Timing (a) T4)
The timing (a) T4 is the timing at which "10S" has elapsed after reaching the "customer waiting period" (customer waiting state).
At that timing, "music A" is not output. That is, when the "customer waiting period" (customer waiting state) is reached, the music continues to be output for "10S", but the music stops when "10S" elapses.
Further, at the timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to the "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), and the special figure determination information is also stored in the "0th storage unit". Is not remembered.
After that, as long as the game ball does not enter the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15, the embodiment continues.

(Timing (c) T0)
(C) is the variation effect pattern 7, and timing (c) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started. When the variable display is started, the audio output device 32 outputs "music A".
Further, at that timing, "musical piece B" and "musical piece C" are not output.
Further, at the timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to the "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), and the special figure determination information is stored only in the "0th storage unit". Is remembered.
Further, at the timing, the "sound effect" can be output.
Further, at the timing, the "starting winning sound" can be output.
Further, at the timing, the "panel lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" emit light at a brightness of LV3.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", "Hold 0", "Sound effect", "Starting winning sound", "Light emitting LV of the board lighting device", "Frame lighting device These aspects of "emission LV." And "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T1.

(Timing (c) T1)
Timing (c) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the "normal reach fluctuation period" is entered.
At that timing, "music A" is not output.
Further, at that timing, "music B" is output. That is, it will be changed to a song accompanying the execution of normal reach.
Further, at that timing, "music C" is not output.
Further, at the timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to the "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), and the special figure determination information is stored only in the "0th storage unit". Is remembered.
Further, at the timing, the "sound effect" can be output.
Further, at the timing, the "starting winning sound" can be output.
Further, at the timing, the "panel lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" emit light at a brightness of LV3.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", "Hold 0", "Sound effect", "Starting winning sound", "Light emitting LV of the board lighting device", "Frame lighting device These aspects of "emission LV." And "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T2.

(Timing (c) T2)
Timing (c) T2 is a timing for shifting from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "SP reach fluctuation period".
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music C" are not output. That is, no music is output while the "background switching" is being performed.
Further, at the timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to the "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), and the special figure determination information is stored only in the "0th storage unit". Is remembered.
Further, at the timing, the "sound effect" can be output. For example, when displaying a shielded image in "background switching", it is possible to output a sound to be shielded.
Further, at the timing, the "starting winning sound" can be output.
Further, at the timing, the "panel lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" emit light at a brightness of LV3.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", "Hold 0", "Sound effect", "Starting winning sound", "Light emitting LV of the board lighting device", "Frame lighting device These aspects of "emission LV." And "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T3.

(Timing (c) T3)
Timing (c) T3 is the timing for shifting to the “SP reach fluctuation period” after finishing the “background switching”.
At that timing, "music A" and "music B" are not output.
Further, at that timing, "music C" is output. That is, the music accompanying the execution of the SP reach is output.
Further, at the timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to the "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), and the special figure determination information is stored only in the "0th storage unit". Is remembered.
Further, at the timing, the "sound effect" can be output. For example, when displaying a title indicating the content of SP reach, it is possible to output a sound indicating that the title has been displayed.
Further, at the timing, the "starting winning sound" can be output.
Further, at the timing, the "panel lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" emit light at a brightness of LV3.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", "Hold 0", "Sound effect", "Starting winning sound", "Light emitting LV of the board lighting device", "Frame lighting device These aspects of "emission LV." And "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T4.

(Timing (c) T4)
Timing (c) T4 is a timing for performing "loss notification" to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss in the "SP reach fluctuation period".
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music C" are not output. That is, by stopping all the songs, it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss.
Further, at the timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to the "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), and the special figure determination information is stored only in the "0th storage unit". Is remembered.
Further, at the timing, the "sound effect" can be output. For example, it is possible to output a sound notifying that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss.
Further, at the timing, the "starting winning sound" can be output.
Further, at the timing, the "panel lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" emit light at a brightness of LV3.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", "Hold 0", "Sound effect", "Starting winning sound", "Light emitting LV of the board lighting device", "Frame lighting device These aspects of "emission LV." And "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T5.

(Timing (c) T5)
Timing (c) T5 is a timing for shifting from the “SP reach fluctuation period” to the “background switching” for switching from the “SP reach fluctuation period” to the “temporary stop display period” after the “SP reach fluctuation period” is completed.
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music C" are not output.
Further, at the timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to the "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), and the special figure determination information is stored only in the "0th storage unit". Is remembered.
Further, at the timing, the "sound effect" can be output. For example, it is possible to output the sound associated with the display of the "specific image".
Further, at the timing, the "starting winning sound" can be output.
Further, at the timing, the "panel lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" emit light at a brightness of LV2. That is, the brightness is lowered as the "specific image" is displayed. As a result, when the "specific image" is displayed, the brightness of the entire gaming machine 1 is lowered, so that the end of the reach effect can be clearly recognized.
Further, at the timing, the "specific image" is displayed so as to be visible.

Then, "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", "Hold 0", "Sound effect", "Starting winning sound", "Light emitting LV of the board lighting device", "Frame lighting device These aspects of "emission LV." And "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T6.
The display time of the "specific image" from the timing (c) T5 to the timing (c) T6 is "2S".

That is, the "starting winning sound" can be output even while the "specific image" is being displayed. As described in FIG. 43 and the like, the hold icon is hidden while the "specific image" is being displayed. Therefore, the hold icon is displayed by entering any of the starting ports while the "specific image" is being displayed. Even when the look-ahead effect to be changed is executed, the hold icon whose color is changed in real time cannot be displayed.
However, since the "starting prize sound" corresponding to the color to be changed can be output, even if the hold icon whose color has changed is hidden, if the player is a skilled player, the output "starting winning sound" is output. You can listen to and determine what color the hold icon is.
In addition, if the "starting winning sound" is not output, it is assumed that the hold icon whose color suddenly changes after the "specific image" is displayed may be displayed, which gives the player a sense of discomfort, but the "starting winning sound" By making it possible to output "", it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

(Timing (c) T6)
Timing (c) T6 is a timing for shifting to the “temporary stop display period” after finishing the “background switching”.
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music C" are not output.
Further, at the timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to the "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), and the special figure determination information is stored only in the "0th storage unit". Is remembered.
Further, at the timing, the "starting winning sound" can be output.
Further, at the timing, the "panel lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" emit light at a brightness of LV3.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", "Hold 0", "Sound effect", "Starting winning sound", "Light emitting LV of the board lighting device", "Frame lighting device These aspects of "emission LV." And "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T7.

(Timing (c) T7)
Timing (c) T7 is a timing at which the “temporary stop display period” ends and the process shifts to the “fixed stop display period”.
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music C" are not output.
Further, at the relevant timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to the "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), but is stored in the "0th storage unit". The figure judgment information is deleted.
Further, at the timing, the "starting winning sound" can be output.
Further, at the timing, the "panel lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" emit light at a brightness of LV3.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", "Hold 0", "Sound effect", "Starting winning sound", "Light emitting LV of the board lighting device", "Frame lighting device These aspects of "light emitting LV." And "specific image" are continued until the timing (c) T8, and when the timing (c) T8 is reached, the variation effect pattern 7 ends (1 game ends). Become.

(Timing (c) T8)
Timing (c) T8 is a timing for shifting to the “customer waiting waiting period” (customer waiting state) after ending the “fixed stop display period”.
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music C" are not output.
Further, at the timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to the "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), and the special figure determination information is also stored in the "0th storage unit". Is not remembered.
Further, at the timing, the "starting winning sound" can be output.
Further, at the timing, the "panel lighting device" and the "frame lighting device" emit light at a brightness of LV3.

Then, "Music A", "Music B", "Music C", "Hold 0", "Sound effect", "Starting winning sound", "Light emitting LV of the board lighting device", "Frame lighting device These aspects of "light emitting LV." Continue thereafter as long as the game ball does not enter the first starting port 14 and the second starting port 15.

That is, when the variation effect is finished (at the end of one game), if there is no subsequent hold, and the variation effect pattern executed immediately before is the variation effect pattern 7, after the "fixed stop display period" is finished. During the "customer waiting waiting period" of, the music that was output while the variable effect pattern 7 is being executed is not output.
It should be noted that the variation effect pattern in which the music is not output during the “customer waiting waiting period” is not limited to the variation effect pattern 7. For example, any variation effect pattern shown in FIG. 33 in which a "specific image" is displayed due to a loss may be applied.
In this way, in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed, the music is not output during the "customer waiting waiting period", and as described above, in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is not displayed, the music is not output. Music is continuously output during the "waiting period for customers".
The reason for doing this is also due to the frequency of selection of the variable effect pattern, and the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is not displayed appears more frequently than the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed. Therefore, in such a frequently fluctuating production pattern, the music is continuously output even when the "waiting period for customers" is reached.

Note that FIG. 49 assumes a case where the variable effect pattern 1 is executed in the normal game state and a case where the variable effect pattern 7 is executed in the normal game state.
On the other hand, in the time-saving game state or the high-probability game state, the music may be continuously output during the "customer waiting waiting period" even in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed due to loss. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the advantageous state (short-time gaming state, high-probability gaming state) continues even during the "customer waiting waiting period".

Next, the fluctuation effect pattern at the time of a big hit will be described with reference to the time chart 4 of FIG.
In FIG. 50, a comparison between the variable effect pattern 20 and the variable effect pattern 30 will be described.
In addition, there is a variation effect pattern in which a "specific image" is displayed even at the time of a big hit, and in the present embodiment, the variation effect pattern 30 corresponds to it.

(Timing (e) T0)
(E) is the variation effect pattern 20, and timing (e) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started. When the variable display is started, the audio output device 32 outputs "music A".
Further, at that timing, "musical piece B" and "musical piece C" are not output.
Further, at the timing, the "big hit sound effect" that can be output when notifying the big hit is not output.
Further, at the timing, the "big hit OP music" that can be output at the opening of the big hit is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "big hit sound effect", "big hit OP music", and "specific image" are continued until timing (e) T1. To.

(Timing (e) T1)
The timing (e) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the "normal reach fluctuation period" is entered.
At that timing, "music A" is not output.
Further, at that timing, "music B" is output. That is, it will be changed to a song accompanying the execution of normal reach.
Further, at that timing, "music C" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit sound effect" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit OP song" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "big hit sound effect", "big hit OP music", and "specific image" are continued until timing (e) T2. To.

(Timing (e) T2)
The timing (e) T2 is the timing for shifting from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "SP reach fluctuation period".
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music C" are not output. That is, no music is output while the "background switching" is being performed.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit sound effect" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit OP song" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "big hit sound effect", "big hit OP music", and "specific image" are continued until timing (e) T3. To.

(Timing (e) T3)
The timing (e) T3 is the timing at which the "background switching" is completed and the "SP reach fluctuation period" is entered.
At that timing, "music A" and "music B" are not output.
Further, at that timing, "music C" is output. That is, the music accompanying the execution of the SP reach is output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit sound effect" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit OP song" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "big hit sound effect", "big hit OP music", and "specific image" are continued until timing (e) T4. To.

(Timing (e) T4)
The timing (e) T4 is a timing for performing "big hit notification" to notify that the result of the big hit lottery was a big hit in the "SP reach fluctuation period". In the drawings, it is described as "777" for convenience.
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music C" are not output.
Also, at that timing, a "big hit sound effect" is output. That is, a sound effect (for example, Cuin Cuin) for notifying that it is a big hit is output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit OP song" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "big hit sound effect", "big hit OP music", and "specific image" are continued until timing (e) T5. To.

(Timing (e) T5)
The timing (e) T5 is the timing at which the “SP reach fluctuation period” ends and the “temporary stop display period” shifts to the “temporary stop display period”.
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music C" are not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit sound effect" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit OP song" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "big hit sound effect", "big hit OP music", and "specific image" are continued until timing (e) T6. To.

(Timing (e) T6)
The timing (e) T6 is the timing at which the “temporary stop display period” ends and the process shifts to the “fixed stop display period”.
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music C" are not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit sound effect" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit OP song" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music C", "big hit sound effect", "big hit OP music", and "specific image" are continued until timing (e) T7. To.

(Timing (e) T7)
The timing (e) T7 is the timing for shifting to the “big hit OP (opening)” after the “fixed stop display period” ends.
At that timing, the "big hit OP song" is output. After that, the jackpot OP ends, and the "big hit OP song" is output until the first round game.
In this way, basically, the "specific image" is not displayed in the variable effect pattern at the time of big hit.
That is, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the display of the "specific image" = the notification that the result of the jackpot determination is "missing".
However, as an exception, in the following variation effect pattern 30, a specific image is displayed, which will be described below.

(Timing (f) T0)
(F) is the variation effect pattern 30, and timing (f) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started. When the variable display is started, the audio output device 32 outputs "music A".
Further, at that timing, "musical piece B" and "musical piece D" are not output.
In addition, at that timing, the "recovery music" that can be output during the execution of the resurrection effect that reversely notifies the jackpot after the loss notification is performed is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit sound effect" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit OP song" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music D", "song at the time of resurrection", "sound effect at the time of big hit", "big hit OP music", and "specific image" are the timing (f). It will continue until T1.

(Timing (f) T1)
The timing (f) T1 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the "normal reach fluctuation period" is entered.
At that timing, "music A" is not output.
Further, at that timing, "music B" is output. That is, it will be changed to a song accompanying the execution of normal reach.
Further, at that timing, "musical piece D" is not output.
In addition, at that timing, the "resurrection music" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit sound effect" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit OP song" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music D", "song at the time of resurrection", "sound effect at the time of big hit", "big hit OP music", and "specific image" are the timing (f). It will continue until T2.

(Timing (f) T2)
The timing (f) T2 is the timing for shifting from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "SPSP reach fluctuation period".
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music D" are not output. That is, no music is output while the "background switching" is being performed.
In addition, at that timing, the "song at the time of resurrection" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit sound effect" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit OP song" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music D", "song at the time of resurrection", "sound effect at the time of big hit", "big hit OP music", and "specific image" are the timing (f). It will continue until T3.

(Timing (f) T3)
The timing (f) T3 is the timing for shifting to the “SPSP reach fluctuation period” after finishing the “background switching”.
At that timing, "music A" and "music B" are not output.
Further, at that timing, "music D" is output. That is, the music accompanying the execution of SPSP reach is output.
In addition, at that timing, the "song at the time of resurrection" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit sound effect" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit OP song" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music D", "song at the time of resurrection", "sound effect at the time of big hit", "big hit OP music", and "specific image" are the timing (f). It will continue until T4.

(Timing (f) T4)
The timing (f) T4 is a timing for performing "loss notification" to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss in the "SPSP reach fluctuation period".
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music D" are not output. That is, by stopping all the songs, it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss.
In addition, at that timing, the "song at the time of resurrection" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit sound effect" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit OP song" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music D", "song at the time of resurrection", "sound effect at the time of big hit", "big hit OP music", and "specific image" are the timing (f). It will continue until T5.

(Timing (f) T5)
The timing (f) T5 is the timing for shifting to the “background switching” for switching from the “SPSP reach fluctuation period” to the “temporary stop display period” after ending the “SPSP reach fluctuation period”.
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music D" are not output.
In addition, at that timing, the "resurrection music" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit sound effect" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit OP song" is not output.
Further, at the timing, the "specific image" is displayed so as to be visible.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music D", "song at the time of resurrection", "sound effect at the time of big hit", "big hit OP music", and "specific image" are the timing (f). It will continue until T6.
The display time of the "specific image" from the timing (f) T5 to the timing (f) T6 is "2S".

(Timing (f) T6)
The timing (f) T6 is the timing at which the "background switching" is completed and the "temporary stop display period" is entered.
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music D" are not output.
In addition, at that timing, the "resurrection music" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit sound effect" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit OP song" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music D", "song at the time of resurrection", "sound effect at the time of big hit", "big hit OP music", and "specific image" are the timing (f). It will continue until T7.

(Timing (f) T7)
The timing (f) T7 is the timing at which the “temporary stop display period” ends and the process shifts to the “revival effect”.
That is, if there is a loss, the "temporary stop display period" ends and the process shifts to the "fixed stop display period", but if it is a big hit, the process shifts to the "revival effect" at that timing.
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music D" are not output.
In addition, at that timing, the "revival music" is output. That is, "music at the time of resurrection" is output with the execution of the resurrection production.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit sound effect" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit OP song" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music D", "song at the time of resurrection", "sound effect at the time of big hit", "big hit OP music", and "specific image" are the timing (f). It will continue until T8.

(Timing (f) T8)
The timing (f) T8 is the timing at which the "big hit notification" is performed during the "revival effect".
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music D" are not output.
In addition, at that timing, the "song at the time of resurrection" is output.
Also, at that timing, a "big hit sound effect" is output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit OP song" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music D", "song at the time of resurrection", "sound effect at the time of big hit", "big hit OP music", and "specific image" are the timing (f). It will continue until T9.

(Timing (f) T9)
The timing (f) T9 is a timing for shifting to the “fixed stop display period” after finishing the “revival effect”.
At that timing, "music A", "music B", and "music D" are not output.
In addition, at that timing, the "song at the time of resurrection" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit sound effect" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "big hit OP song" is not output.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of "music A", "music B", "music D", "song at the time of resurrection", "sound effect at the time of big hit", "big hit OP music", and "specific image" are the timing (f). It will continue until T10.

(Timing (f) T10)
The timing (f) T10 is the timing at which the "fixed stop display period" ends and the "big hit OP (opening)" is started.
At that timing, the "big hit OP song" is output. After that, the jackpot OP ends, and the "big hit OP song" is output until the first round game.
As described above, in the variable effect pattern 30 at the time of a big hit accompanied by the revival effect, a specific image is exceptionally displayed.
However, even from the distribution ratio in FIG. 33, the variation effect pattern 30 is rarely selected at the time of big hit, so when comparing the time of loss and the time of big hit, it is overwhelmingly the one at the time of loss. However, there is a relationship that "specific images" are likely to appear.

In this way, the jackpot variation effect pattern 30 with the display of the specific image has a larger number of songs output in one variation effect than the jackpot variation effect pattern 20 without the display of the specific image. It is in. Thereby, the game entertainment can be improved.
Since the variation effect pattern 20 is merely given as an example, the variation effect pattern 20 can be replaced with a jackpot variation effect pattern that does not involve the display of another specific image.
In that case, the variation effect pattern 29 has the number of songs of "4" according to FIG. 47, and the variation effect pattern 30 has the number of songs of "4" according to FIG. 47. Although the number is the same, in other variable effect patterns, since the number of songs is "3", in most of the variable effect patterns of jackpots, a specific image is displayed rather than a variable effect pattern without displaying a specific image. The variable production pattern accompanied by is in a relationship with a larger number of songs.

Next, using the time chart 5 of FIG. 51, the variation effect pattern at the time of loss without displaying the specific image and the variation effect pattern at the time of big hit without displaying the specific image will be compared and described.
In FIG. 51, a variable effect pattern 1 and a variable effect pattern 5 are given as the variable effect pattern at the time of loss, and a variable effect pattern 20 is given as the variable effect pattern at the time of a big hit. Since the pattern has already been described in FIG. 48 and the variation effect pattern at the time of a big hit has already been described in FIG. 50, a detailed description of the time chart will be omitted.

That is, in the variable effect pattern that is lost and does not involve the display of the specific image, the number of songs is "1" or "2" (see FIG. 47), and in the variable effect pattern that is a big hit and does not involve the display of the specific image, The number of songs is "3" or "4".
Therefore, the number of songs output in one variable effect is larger in the variable effect pattern that is a big hit and does not involve the display of the specific image than in the variable effect pattern that is lost and does not involve the display of the specific image. is there.
In other words, if the specific image is not displayed, the degree of expectation for the jackpot can change depending on the number of songs. can do.

It should be noted that the gaming state in which FIGS. 47 to 51 are executed does not matter. For example, it may be applied in all gaming states or in some gaming states.

(Summary of FIGS. 47 to 51)
That is, FIGS. 47 to 51 have the following features.

That is,
When the result of the jackpot determination is a loss (for example, step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process is denied),
The variation effect pattern (for example, variation effect pattern 7 to variation effect pattern 18) accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e is
When the result of the jackpot determination is a loss (for example, step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process is denied),
Compared with the variable effect pattern (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 6) that does not involve the display of the specific image 31e.
It is easy to execute a reach effect composed of a plurality of songs (for example, the variable effect pattern 1 is a variable effect pattern that does not involve the display of the specific image 31e, and the number of songs is 1. On the other hand, the variable effect pattern 7 is. It is a variable effect pattern accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e, and the number of songs is 3 (the number of songs of the reach effect is 2).
There is such a feature.
Thereby, the game entertainment can be improved.

That is,
The first reach effect (for example, variable effect pattern 7) → the number of songs is 3 (the number of songs in the reach effect is 2).
Since the second reach effect (for example, the variable effect pattern 16) → the number of songs is 4 (the number of songs in the reach effect is 3), the number of songs is different.
And (even if the number of songs is different)
When displaying the specific image 31e after executing the first reach effect (for example, (c) T5 to (c) T6 in FIG. 48),
There is a case where the specific image 31e is displayed after executing the second reach effect (for example, (d) T7 to (d) T8 in FIG. 48).
There is such a feature.
As a result, the number of songs is different for each variable effect pattern for which the reach effect is performed, so that the game entertainment can be improved. On the other hand, even for the variable effect pattern for which the reach effect is performed with different numbers of songs, the specific image is specified after the reach effect is executed. Since 31e is displayed, the timing at which the reach effect is completed can be clearly recognized.

That is,
In the variable effect, a specific effect accompanied by a musical composition (for example, variable effect pattern 7 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30) can be executed.
Of the specific effects, at least a part of the period (for example, (c) T2 to (c) T3 in FIG. 48, that is, “background switching”) → a period without music.
Of the specific effects, the period during which the specific image 31e is displayed (for example, (c) T5 to (c) T6 in FIG. 48, that is, “background switching”) → a period without music.
There is such a feature.
As a result, for example, in the period of (c) T2 to (c) T3 of FIG. 48, when changing from the normal reach music to the SP reach music, it is possible to temporarily pause, so that the music change without discomfort can be performed. It can be carried out.
Further, for example, in the period of (c) T5 to (c) T6 of FIG. 48, the silence makes it possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended.

That is, in the variable production
Before the specific image 31e is displayed → accompanied by a musical piece (for example, in the case of the variable effect pattern 7, music A, music B, and music C are output).
After the specific image 31e is displayed → No music is accompanied (for example, no music is output).
There is such a feature.
As a result, it is possible to improve the expectation for a big hit by outputting the music before the display based on the display of the "specific image". On the other hand, by not outputting the music after the display, it is possible to prevent giving an excessive sense of expectation to the jackpot.

That is,
In the variation effect pattern (for example, variation effect pattern 7) accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e,
"Stop sound" in "temporary stop display period" → is not output (for example, (c) T6 to (c) T7 in FIG. 48).
In the variation effect pattern (for example, variation effect pattern 1) that does not involve the display of the specific image 31e,
"Stop sound" in "temporary stop display period" → output (for example, (a) T1 to (a) T2 in FIG. 48).
There is such a feature.
This makes it possible to output a suitable "stop sound" according to the selection frequency and the content of the effect.

Next, the third feature portion related to the specific image will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 57.
Although some of FIGS. 52 to 57 omit the description because they mainly refer to the advance notice effect, the contents described in FIGS. 42 to 46 and the contents described in FIGS. 47 to 51 have been described. The contents can be used in combination as appropriate.

FIG. 52 is a time chart 6 showing the details of each variation effect pattern (see FIG. 33), and FIG. 52 (a) shows the details of the variation effect pattern 10, and mainly shows the details of the pseudo-ream. (B) shows the details of the variation effect pattern 5, and mainly shows the details of the dialogue notice. (C) shows the details of the variable effect pattern 7, and mainly shows the details of the roulette notice effect. (D) shows the details of the variation effect pattern 33, and mainly shows the details of the SU notice effect.
Further, the details of the relationship between the "specific image" displayed on the image display device 31 and the advance notice effect are shown for each variable effect pattern.

(Timing (a) T0)
(A) is the variation effect pattern 10, and the timing (a) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started.
At this timing, the "normally fluctuating image" is displayed on the "image display device".
In addition, at that timing, the "line notice effect" can be executed.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of the "image display device", the "speech notice effect", and the "specific image" are continued until the timing (a) T1.

(Timing (a) T1)
Timing (a) T1 is a timing for shifting from the “normal fluctuation period” to the “pseudo-continuous 2 notification period”.
At this timing, the character image (corresponding to the dialogue notice effect) indicating that the pseudo-ream continues is displayed on the "image display device".
Further, after that, the "NEXT symbol" suggesting the execution of the pseudo-ream is displayed on the "image display device" up to the timing (a) T2.
In addition, at that timing, the "line notice effect" can be executed. That is, in the "pseudo-ream 2 notification period", the "line notice effect", which is one aspect of the advance notice effect, can be executed in duplicate.
It should be noted that not only the "line notice effect" but also other notice effects (not shown) can be executed.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of the "image display device", the "speech notice effect", and the "specific image" are continued through the timing (a) T2 until the timing (a) T3.

(Timing (a) T3)
Timing (a) T3 is a timing for shifting from the “pseudo-ream 2 notification period” to the “continuous production”.
At this timing, the "image display device" displays a "continuation effect image" indicating that the pseudo-ream has continued.
In addition, at that timing, the "line notice effect" is not executed.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of the "image display device", the "speech notice effect", and the "specific image" are continued until the timing (a) T4.

(Timing (a) T4)
The timing (a) T4 is the timing for shifting from the “continuous effect” to the “pseudo-continuous 2 variable period”.
At this timing, the "pseudo-continuous 2 variable image" is displayed on the "image display device".
In addition, at that timing, the "line notice effect" can be executed.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of the "image display device", the "speech notice effect", and the "specific image" are continued until the timing (a) T5.

(Timing (a) T5)
Timing (a) T5 is a timing for shifting from the “pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period” to the “pseudo-ream 3 notification period”.
At this timing, the character image "continue !?" suggesting that the pseudo-ream continues is displayed on the "image display device".
Further, after that, the "NEXT symbol" suggesting the execution of the pseudo-ream is displayed on the "image display device" up to the timing (a) T6.
In addition, at that timing, the "line notice effect" can be executed. That is, in the "pseudo-ream 3 notification period", the "line notice effect", which is one aspect of the advance notice effect, can be executed in duplicate.
It should be noted that not only the "line notice effect" but also other notice effects (not shown) can be executed.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of the "image display device", the "speech notice effect", and the "specific image" are continued through the timing (a) T6 until the timing (a) T7.

(Timing (a) T7)
Timing (a) T7 is a timing for shifting from the “pseudo-ream 3 notification period” to the “continuous production”.
At this timing, the "image display device" displays a "continuation effect image" indicating that the pseudo-ream has continued.
In addition, at that timing, the "line notice effect" is not executed.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of the "image display device", the "speech notice effect", and the "specific image" are continued until the timing (a) T8.

(Timing (a) T8)
The timing (a) T8 is the timing for shifting from the “continuous effect” to the “pseudo-continuous 3 variable period”.
At this timing, the "pseudo-ream 3 variable image" is displayed on the "image display device".
In addition, at that timing, the "line notice effect" can be executed.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of the "image display device", the "speech notice effect", and the "specific image" are continued until the timing (a) T9.

(Timing (a) T9)
Timing (a) T9 is a timing for shifting from the “pseudo-continuous 3 fluctuation period” to the “normal reach fluctuation period”.
At this timing, the "normal reach image" is displayed on the "image display device".
In addition, at that timing, the "line notice effect" is not executed.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of the "image display device", the "speech notice effect", and the "specific image" are continued until the timing (a) T10.

(Timing (a) T10)
Timing (a) T10 is a timing for shifting from the “normal reach fluctuation period” to the “background switching”.
At that timing, the "switching image" is displayed on the "image display device".
In addition, at that timing, the "line notice effect" is not executed.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of the "image display device", the "speech notice effect", and the "specific image" are continued until the timing (a) T11.

(Timing (a) T11)
Timing (a) T11 is a timing for shifting from "background switching" to "SP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, the "SP reach image" is displayed on the "image display device".
In addition, at that timing, the "line notice effect" is not executed.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of the "image display device", the "speech notice effect", and the "specific image" are continued until the timing (a) T12.

(Timing (a) T12)
Timing (a) T12 is a timing for performing "loss notification" to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss in the "SP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, the "loss notification image" is displayed on the "image display device".
In addition, at that timing, the "line notice effect" is not executed.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of the "image display device", the "speech notice effect", and the "specific image" are continued until the timing (a) T13.

(Timing (a) T13)
Timing (a) T13 is a timing for shifting from the “SP reach fluctuation period” to the “background switching”.
At this timing, the "specific image" is displayed on the "image display device" for 2S.
In addition, at that timing, the "line notice effect" is not executed. That is, in the "background switching" of the timing (a) T13 to the timing (a) T14, the "line notice effect", which is one aspect of the advance notice effect, cannot be executed in duplicate. It should be noted that not only the "line notice effect" but also other notice effects (not shown) cannot be executed.

Then, these aspects of the "image display device", the "speech notice effect", and the "specific image" are continued until the timing (a) T14.

(Timing (a) T14)
Timing (a) T14 is a timing for shifting from the “background switching” to the “temporary stop display period”.
At this timing, the "temporary stop image" is displayed on the "image display device".
In addition, at that timing, the "line notice effect" is not executed.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of the "image display device", the "speech notice effect", and the "specific image" are continued until the timing (a) T15.

(Timing (a) T15)
Timing (a) T15 is a timing for shifting from the “temporary stop display period” to the “fixed stop display period”.
At this timing, the "fixed stop image" is displayed on the "image display device".
In addition, at that timing, the "line notice effect" is not executed.
Further, at that timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these aspects of the "image display device", the "speech notice effect", and the "specific image" are continued until the timing (a) T16, and when the timing (a) T16 is reached, the variation effect pattern 10 ends. (1 game is over).

The temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period" constitutes a "suggestion effect" according to the result of the jackpot determination.
Further, the display of the "specific image" constitutes a "suggestion notification effect" that predicts that the suggestion effect (temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period") is executed.
As for the display of the "specific image", referring to FIG. 33, it is easier to display the "specific image" at the time of loss than at the time of big hit. Therefore, it can be said that the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period" after the display of the "specific image" is a specific suggestive effect suggesting that the jackpot game is unlikely to be executed. Further, it can be said that the display of the "specific image" is a specific suggestion notification effect suggesting that the jackpot game is unlikely to be executed.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the time chart of (a) variation effect pattern 10 of FIG. 52, a supplementary explanation will be given using the animation of FIG. 54 for a part of the display mode of the variation effect pattern 10.
FIG. 54 shows only the image display device 31 extracted, and since each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as the content described in FIG. 43 and the like, the description thereof will be omitted.

(Display example in variable effect pattern 10)
(A) T0 to T1 correspond to the "normal fluctuation period".
That is, the left effect symbol 38a, the middle effect symbol 38b, and the right effect symbol 38c are scrolled in the vertical direction.
After that, the left effect symbol 38a and the right effect symbol 38c are temporarily stopped and displayed, and only the middle effect symbol 38b is scrolled in the vertical direction.

(A) T1 to T2 correspond to the "pseudo-ream 2 notification period".
That is, the left effect symbol 38a and the right effect symbol 38c are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the "NEXT symbol 31 m" (the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous execution suggestion symbol) appears from above the screen as the middle effect symbol 38b.
Further, a character image 31l is displayed, and a character image (corresponding to a dialogue notice effect) indicating that the pseudo-ream continues is emitted from the character image 31l.

(A) T2 to T3 correspond to the "pseudo-ream 2 notification period".
That is, the left effect symbol 38a and the right effect symbol 38c are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the "NEXT symbol 31 m" appearing from the upper part of the screen is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the screen (may be a fixed stop display).

(A) T3 to T4 correspond to "continuous production".
That is, the left effect symbol 38a and the right effect symbol 38c are temporarily stopped and displayed, an effect image is displayed around the temporary stop display "NEXT symbol 31 m" in the center of the screen, and the number of pseudo consecutive times is displayed in the upper right of the display area. The "pseudo-ream number image 31n" indicating the above is displayed with the display content of "x2".
At this time, the voice output device 32 outputs a sound effect of "Jaquin!" As a pseudo-continuous continuous effect.

(A) T4 to T5 correspond to the "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period".
That is, (a) just by adding the "pseudo-continuous number image 31n" of "x2" to the display contents shown by T0 to T1, it seems that a new variation effect has been started.

(A) T6 to T7 correspond to the "pseudo-ream 2 notification period".
That is, the left effect symbol 38a and the right effect symbol 38c are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the "NEXT symbol 31 m" appearing from the upper part of the screen is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the screen.

(A) T7 to T8 correspond to "continuous production".
That is, the left effect symbol 38a and the right effect symbol 38c are temporarily stopped and displayed, an effect image is displayed around the temporary stop display "NEXT symbol 31 m" in the center of the screen, and the number of pseudo consecutive times is displayed in the upper right of the display area. The "pseudo-ream number image 31n" indicating the above is displayed with the display content of "x3".
At this time, the voice output device 32 outputs a sound effect of "Jaquin!" As a pseudo-continuous continuous effect.

In the variation effect pattern 10 accompanied by the pseudo-ream, the display mode is as described above.
The "pseudo-ream fluctuation period" of the "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period" and the "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation period" constitutes a "suggestion effect" according to the result of the jackpot determination.
Further, the "pseudo-ream notification period" of the "pseudo-ream 2 notification period" and the "pseudo-ream 3 notification period" is the "pseudo-ream fluctuation" of the suggestion effect ("pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation period". It constitutes a "suggestion notification effect" that predicts that the "period") will be executed.

Although the time relationship is not particularly described on the time chart, the time from the "pseudo-ream 2 notification period" to the "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period" (in other words, from the "first suggestion notification effect" to " The time from the display of the "specific image" to the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period" (in other words, from the "second suggestion notification effect") It is composed of a longer time than the time until the "second suggestion effect").
Further, the effect execution time of the "pseudo-ream 2 notification period" and the "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period" is the effect execution time of the display of the "specific image" and the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period". It is composed of a longer time than the above (hereinafter, it may be referred to as "relationship of production execution time").
Thereby, for example, in the "first suggestion notification effect" to the "first suggestion effect" performed before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, the expectation for the jackpot can be maintained for a long time. ..
On the other hand, for example, in the "second suggestion notification effect" to the "second suggestion effect" performed after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, the suggestion expected to be promptly executed by the suggestion notification effect. By executing the production, it is possible to prevent the excessive expectation for the jackpot from being improved.
The relationship between the times is not limited to this, and the two may have the same time, or the two may have the opposite relationship.

Returning to the description of the time chart of FIG. 52 again.
(Timing (b) T0)
(B) is the variation effect pattern 5, and timing (b) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started.
At this timing, the "normally fluctuating image" is displayed on the "image display device".
In addition, at that timing, the "line notice effect" can be executed.

Then, these aspects of the "image display device" and the "speech notice effect" are continued until the timing (b) T1.

(Timing (b) T1)
The timing (b) T1 is the timing at which the dialogue advance notice effect is executed during the variable display.
At this timing, the "normally fluctuating image" and the image "reach!" That notifies the execution of the reach effect in advance are displayed on the "image display device".
Then, these aspects of the "image display device" and the "speech notice effect" continue until the timing (b) T2, and then the "normal fluctuation period" ends when the timing (b) T3 is reached.

(Timing (b) T3)
Timing (b) T3 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the "normal reach fluctuation period" is reached.
At this timing, the "normal reach image" is displayed on the "image display device".
In addition, at that timing, the "line notice effect" is not executed.
It should be noted that the description of the following contents of the variation effect pattern 5 is omitted.

Here, in order to facilitate the understanding of the time chart of the variation effect pattern 5 (b) of FIG. 52, a part of the display mode of the variation effect pattern 5 will be supplementarily described using the animation of FIG. 55.
FIG. 55 shows only the image display device 31 extracted, and since each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as the content described in FIG. 43 and the like, the description thereof will be omitted.

(Display example in variable effect pattern 5)
(B) T0 to T1 correspond to those before the execution of the dialogue notice effect in the "normal fluctuation period".
That is, the left effect symbol 38a, the middle effect symbol 38b, and the right effect symbol 38c are scrolled in the vertical direction.
After that, in (b) T1 to T2, the character image 31l is displayed, and from the character image 31l, the dialogue image "Reach!" Is displayed (issued) to notify the execution of the reach effect in advance.

Then, in (b) T2 to T3, the left effect symbol 38a (5 symbols) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and in (b) T3 to, the right effect symbol 38c (5 symbols) is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the 5 symbols. Normal reach production is executed.

The variation effect pattern 5 has the above display mode.
The "normal reach fluctuation period" constitutes a "suggestion effect" according to the result of the jackpot determination.
Further, in the "line notice effect", the line image (the line image "reach!") That informs the execution of the reach effect in advance predicts that the suggestion effect ("normal reach fluctuation period") will be executed. "Suggestion notification effect" is configured.
Even when the "speech notice effect" is executed in the variable effect pattern 10, the above-mentioned "effect execution time" is related to the relationship between the display of the "specific image" and the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period". Relationship "applies.

Returning to the description of the time chart of FIG. 52 again.
(Timing (c) T0)
(C) is the variation effect pattern 7, and timing (c) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started.
At this timing, the "normally fluctuating image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Further, at the timing, the "roulette notice effect" can be executed.

Then, these aspects of the "image display device" and the "roulette notice effect" are continued until the timing (c) T1.

(Timing (c) T1)
The timing (c) T1 is the timing at which the roulette notice effect is executed during the variable display.
At this timing, a "roulette effect image" (a roulette effect image in which a plurality of options are displayed) is displayed on the "image display device". Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, an effect of selecting one of the plurality of options is executed.
Then, these aspects of the "image display device" and the "roulette notice effect" continue until the timing (c) T2, and then the "normal fluctuation period" ends when the timing (c) T3 is reached.

(Timing (c) T3)
Timing (c) T3 is the timing at which the "normal fluctuation period" ends and the "normal reach fluctuation period" is reached.
After that, the timing (c) T4 shifts to "background switching", the timing (c) T5 shifts to the "SP reach fluctuation period", and the "image display device" displays the corresponding images. Will be done.
It should be noted that the description of the following contents of the variation effect pattern 7 is omitted.

Here, in order to facilitate the understanding of the time chart of the variation effect pattern 7 (c) of FIG. 52, a supplementary explanation will be given using the animation of FIG. 56 for a part of the display mode of the variation effect pattern 7.
FIG. 56 shows only the image display device 31 extracted, and since each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as the content described in FIG. 43 and the like, the description thereof will be omitted.

(Display example in variable effect pattern 7)
(C) T0 to T1 correspond to those before the execution of the roulette notice effect in the "normal fluctuation period".
That is, the left effect symbol 38a, the middle effect symbol 38b, and the right effect symbol 38c are scrolled in the vertical direction.
After that, in (c) T1 to T2, the roulette effect image 31o is displayed, and corresponds to the roulette pattern 1 (see FIG. 37) of "x", "?", "SP", "heat", and "rainbow". The options to do are displayed.
Then, an effect of selecting one of the options (an effect of rotating and moving the selection cursor image) is performed, and the effect is continued for a predetermined time.
Then, when the predetermined time elapses, the screen becomes dark except for the option 1, and the user is notified that the option 1 has been selected.
In FIG. 56, it is assumed that "SP" is selected.

(C) T3 to T4 indicate a "normal reach fluctuation period", and (c) T4 to T5 indicate a "background switching", and a switching image (an image of "development!") Is displayed.
In (c) T4 to T5, the background image imitating the mountain corresponding to the "normal reach fluctuation period" is not displayed, and the whiteout image is displayed in addition to the character image "development!". There is.
And (c) T5 to shows "SP reach fluctuation period". In the "SP reach fluctuation period", the background image that imitates the mountain corresponding to the "normal reach fluctuation period" is not displayed, and the character image "SP reach!" And the image in which the character images confront each other are displayed. Will be done.

The variation effect pattern 7 has the above display mode.
The "SP reach fluctuation period" constitutes a "suggestion effect" according to the result of the jackpot determination.
Further, in the "roulette notice effect", the selection of options (in the example of FIG. 56, the selection of "SP") is a "suggestion" that predicts that the suggestion effect ("SP reach fluctuation period") is executed. "Notification effect" is configured.
Even when the "roulette notice effect" is executed in the variable effect pattern 10, the above-mentioned "effect execution time" is related to the relationship between the display of the "specific image" and the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period". Relationship "applies.

Returning to the description of the time chart of FIG. 52 again.
(Timing (d) T0)
(D) is the variation effect pattern 33, and the timing (d) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started.
At this timing, the "normally fluctuating image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Further, at the timing, the "SU notice effect" can be executed.

Then, these aspects of the "image display device" and the "SU notice effect" are continued until the timing (d) T1.

(Timing (d) T1)
The timing (d) T1 is the timing at which the SU notice effect is executed during the variable display.
At this timing, the "SU notice effect image" is displayed on the "image display device". In addition, in FIG. 52, it is assumed that "Probability SU5" is finally displayed. Therefore, the display is switched in order of "SU1"->"SU2"->"SU3"->"SU4"->"SU5"->"correctSU5" at predetermined time intervals.
Then, these aspects of the "image display device" and the "SU notice effect" continue until the timing (d) T2, and then the "normal fluctuation period" ends when the timing (d) T3 is reached.

(Timing (d) T3)
Timing (d) T3 is a timing that ends the "normal fluctuation period" and reaches the "normal reach fluctuation period".
After that, the timing (d) T4 shifts to the "full rotation fluctuation period", the timing (c) T5 shifts to the "temporary stop display period", and the timing (c) T6 shifts to the "fixed stop display period". After the transition, the images corresponding to the respective images are displayed on the "image display device".
The following detailed description of the variation effect pattern 33 will be omitted.

Here, in order to facilitate the understanding of the time chart of (d) the variation effect pattern 33 of FIG. 52, a supplementary explanation will be given using the animation of FIG. 57 for a part of the display mode of the variation effect pattern 33.
FIG. 57 shows only the image display device 31 extracted, and since each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as the content described in FIG. 43 and the like, the description thereof will be omitted.

(Display example in variable effect pattern 33)
(D) T0 to T1 correspond to those before the execution of the SU notice effect in the "normal fluctuation period".
That is, the left effect symbol 38a, the middle effect symbol 38b, and the right effect symbol 38c are scrolled in the vertical direction.
After that, in (d) T1 to, the step-up notice effect image 31p is displayed, and in (d) to T2, the step-up notice effect image 31p of "correct SU5 full rotation" is displayed.
Further, in addition to the display of the step-up notice effect image 31p of "correct SU5 full rotation", the voice output device 32 outputs a notification sound (cure! Cue!) Notifying that the fluctuation is a big hit.

(D) T4 to T5 indicate "total rotation fluctuation period". In the "total rotation fluctuation period", the left effect symbol 38a, the middle effect symbol 38b, and the right effect symbol 38c are aligned in the same pattern and scrolled in the vertical direction.
Then, at (d) T5 to T6, the left effect symbol 38a (7 symbols), the middle effect symbol 38b (7 symbols), and the right effect symbol 38c (7 symbols) are temporarily stopped and displayed, and at (d) T6 to T7, The left effect symbol 38a (7 symbols), the middle effect symbol 38b (7 symbols), and the right effect symbol 38c (7 symbols) are fixedly stopped and displayed.

The variation effect pattern 33 has the above display mode.
The "total rotation fluctuation period" constitutes a "suggestion effect" according to the result of the jackpot determination.
Further, in the "SU notice effect", the display of the step-up notice effect image 31p (in the example of FIG. 56, the display of "correct SU5 full rotation") is executed by the suggestion effect ("total rotation fluctuation period"). It constitutes a "suggestion notification effect" that is expected to be performed.
Even when the "SU notice effect" is executed in the variable effect pattern 10, the above-mentioned "effect execution time" is related to the relationship between the display of the "specific image" and the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period". Relationship "applies.

In the above, (a) the variable effect pattern 10, (b) the variable effect pattern 5, (c) the variable effect pattern 7, and (d) the variable effect pattern 33 have been described as examples. According to them, before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination (for example, "loss notification" in FIG. 52 (a)), the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination (for example, "loss notification" in FIG. 52 (a)) It is characterized by a large number of feasible suggestion effects compared to after "notification").
Further, before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination (for example, "loss notification" in FIG. 52 (a)), the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination (for example, "loss notification" in FIG. 52 (a)). It is characterized by a large number of feasible suggestion notification effects compared to later.
That is, before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination (for example, "missing notification" in FIG. 52A),
Production by combining "pseudo-ream 2 notification period" and "pseudo-ream 3 notification period" (suggestion notification production) and "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period" and "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation period" (suggestion production) Production, pseudo-ream 3 production),
In the "line notice effect", a combination of a line image (a line image saying "reach!") (Suggestion notification effect) that notifies the execution of the reach effect in advance and a "normal reach fluctuation period" (suggestion effect) (line). Notice production and normal reach production),
In the "roulette notice effect", the effect (roulette notice) by combining the selection of options (in the example of FIG. 56, the selection of "SP") (suggestion notification effect) and the "SP reach fluctuation period" (suggestion effect). Production and roulette-compatible production),
Display of step-up notice effect image 31p in "SU notice effect" (in the example of FIG. 56, display of "correct SU5 full rotation") (suggestion notification effect) and "total rotation fluctuation period" (suggestion effect) Production by combination with (SU notice production and SU compatible production),
Is feasible, while
After the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination (for example, "missing notification" in FIG. 52 (a)),
A combination of the display of the "specific image" (suggestion notification effect) and the temporary stop display (suggestion effect) of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period" (background switching effect and temporary stop display effect),
Is feasible.
As a result, before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to improve the expectation for the jackpot by a plurality of types of suggestion notification effects and suggestion effects.
Further, after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to prevent the excessive expectation for the jackpot from being improved.

As described above, since the number of feasible suggestion notification effects and suggestion effects is larger before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination than after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the jackpot determination can be obtained. Prior to the timing of notification, depending on the degree of execution of the advance notice effect, a combination of the first suggestion notification effect and the first suggestion effect (for example, pseudo-ream 2 effect, pseudo-ream 3 effect) and the second suggestion effect It is possible to execute an effect by combining the suggestion notification effect and the second suggestion effect (for example, a dialogue notice effect and a normal reach effect), and after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, the third suggestion notification effect It is said that it is possible to execute an effect (background switching effect and temporary stop display effect) by combining (display of the specific image 31e) and the third suggestion effect (temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period"). I can say.

Not limited to such a form, the number of executable suggestion notification effects and suggestion effects may be the same before and after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, or the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination. The latter may have a larger number of feasible suggestion notification effects and suggestion effects than the front.

Further, as shown in the example of (a) variation effect pattern 10 of FIG. 52, for example, in the "pseudo-ream 2 notification period", another advance notice effect (for example, "line notice effect") is simultaneously performed during the execution. Although it is feasible, for example, in the display of the "specific image", another notice effect (for example, "line notice effect") cannot be executed at the same time during the execution.
That is, when the first suggestion notification effect (“pseudo-ream 2 notification period”) is executed, the advance notice effect can be executed, and when the second suggestion notification effect (display of “specific image”) is executed, , It can be said that the notice production is not executed.
As a result, in the phase of improving the expectation for the big hit, the expectation for the big hit can be further improved by simultaneously executing other notice effects.
Further, in the phase of preventing the excessive expectation for the jackpot from being improved, it is possible to maintain the prevention of increasing the excessive expectation for the jackpot by not executing the other advance notice effects at the same time.

FIG. 53 is a drawing obtained by extracting a part of the variation effect pattern of FIG. 33, and in particular, (a) the relationship between the number of pseudo-continuouss for each variation effect pattern and the appearance degree of a specific image (at the time of loss), and (b) loss. It shows the relationship between the time and the time of big hit and the degree of appearance of a specific image.
It should be noted that, in FIG. 53, the variation effect pattern in which the number of pseudo-reams is set to 1 is apparently changed twice, such as normal variation → pseudo-ream success → normal variation. , "Pseudo-ream 2 production". In addition, the fluctuation effect pattern in which the number of pseudo-reams is set to 2 times is, for example, normal fluctuation-> pseudo-ream success-> normal fluctuation-> pseudo-ream success-> normal reach fluctuation. Therefore, it becomes a "pseudo-ream 3 production". In addition, the fluctuation effect pattern in which the number of pseudo-reams is set to 3 is, for example, normal fluctuation-> pseudo-ream success-> normal fluctuation-> pseudo-ream success-> normal fluctuation-> pseudo-ream success-> normal reach fluctuation. Since the fluctuation is performed four times, it becomes a "pseudo-ream 4 production".
Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the "pseudo-ream 2 effect", the "pseudo-ream 3 effect", and the "pseudo-ream 4 effect" can be similarly executed in the variable effect pattern in the jackpot.
The pseudo-ream effect that can be executed is not limited to this, and may be further "pseudo-ream 5 effect" or "pseudo-ream 6 effect".

(A) shows the relationship between the number of pseudo-reams for each variation effect pattern and the appearance degree of the specific image (at the time of loss), and is an excerpt of the variation effect pattern in which the pseudo-ream is executed due to the loss. Of these, the variation effect pattern without displaying the "specific image" is only the variation effect pattern 3, and the other variation effect patterns are the variation effect patterns with the display of the "specific image".
For example, when the variation effect pattern 3 is compared with another variation effect pattern, the "specific image" is more likely to be displayed in the variation effect pattern in which the number of pseudo-reams is defined to be larger. The reason is that the larger the number of pseudo-reams, the easier it is to shift to SP reach or higher, so that the "specific image" is more likely to be displayed in the situation. This is because it is necessary to clearly notify that the reach effect has ended as a loss after the loss notification is performed, so that the "specific image" is easily displayed.

When the pseudo continuous notice is given, the specific image 31e may be displayed regardless of the number of times, and the specific image 31e is displayed in the variation effect pattern in which the number of pseudo continuous times is specified more. It may be difficult.

(B) shows the relationship of the appearance degree of the specific image between the time of loss and the time of big hit, and is an excerpt of the variation effect pattern accompanied by the display of the "specific image". As described above, the variation effect pattern 30 that accompanies the display of the "specific image" at the time of the jackpot is only the variation effect pattern 30, and the variation effect pattern 30 varies at the time of the jackpot even from the distribution ratio of FIG. Since the effect pattern 30 is rarely selected, the variable effect pattern accompanied by the display of the "specific image" tends to appear more easily at the time of loss than at the time of big hit.
This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the display of the "specific image" = the result of the jackpot judgment was a loss, and the display of the "specific image" makes the player recognize that the reach effect has ended due to a loss. It can be made easier.

It should be noted that the variation effect pattern accompanied by the display of the "specific image" may be more likely to appear at the time of big hit than at the time of loss.

It should be noted that the gaming state in which FIGS. 52 to 57 are executed does not matter. For example, it may be applied in all gaming states or in some gaming states.

(Summary of FIGS. 52 to 57)
That is, FIGS. 52 to 57 have the following features.

That is,
In the variable production
Suggestion effect according to the result of jackpot judgment (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation period", "normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "total rotation fluctuation period", "provisional" Temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "stop display period") and
Suggestion notification effect that predicts that the suggestion effect will be executed (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 notification period", "pseudo-ream 3 notification period", "reach!" Selection of options in "notice effect" (for example, selection of "SP" in FIG. 56), display of step-up notice effect image 31p in "SU notice effect" (for example, display of "correct SU5 full rotation" in FIG. 56), (Display of "specific image 31e")) can be executed.
The number of possible suggestion notification effects and suggestion effects differs between before and after the predetermined timing (for example, (a) T12 in FIG. 52) for notifying the result of the jackpot determination.
There is such a feature.
As a result, before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, the suggestion notification effect and the suggestion effect can improve the expectation for the jackpot.
Further, after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to prevent the excessive expectation for the jackpot from being improved.

That is,
In the variable production
Suggestion effect according to the result of jackpot judgment (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation period", "normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "total rotation fluctuation period", "provisional" Temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "stop display period") and
Suggestion notification effect that predicts that the suggestion effect will be executed (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 notification period", "pseudo-ream 3 notification period", "reach!" Selection of options in "notice effect" (for example, selection of "SP" in FIG. 56), display of step-up notice effect image 31p in "SU notice effect" (for example, display of "correct SU5 full rotation" in FIG. 56), (Display of "specific image 31e")) can be executed.
Before the predetermined timing for notifying the result of the jackpot determination (for example, (a) T12 in FIG. 52) → The first effect by combining the first suggestion notification effect and the first suggestion effect (for example, the pseudo-ream 2 effect, It is possible to execute the pseudo-ream 3 effect) and the second effect (for example, the dialogue notice effect and the normal reach effect) by combining the second suggestion notification effect and the second suggestion effect.
After a predetermined timing for notifying the result of the jackpot determination (for example, (a) T12 in FIG. 52) → A third suggestion notification effect (for example, display of the specific image 31e) and a third suggestion effect (for example, “temporary stop”) It is possible to execute a third effect (for example, a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect) in combination with the effect symbol 38 in the "display period".
There is such a feature.
As a result, before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, the suggestion notification effect and the suggestion effect can improve the expectation for the jackpot.
Further, after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to prevent the excessive expectation for the jackpot from being improved.

That is,
In the variable production
Suggestion effect according to the result of jackpot judgment (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation period", "normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "total rotation fluctuation period", "provisional" Temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "stop display period") and
Suggestion notification effect that predicts that the suggestion effect will be executed (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 notification period", "pseudo-ream 3 notification period", "reach!" Selection of options in "notice effect" (for example, selection of "SP" in FIG. 56), display of step-up notice effect image 31p in "SU notice effect" (for example, display of "correct SU5 full rotation" in FIG. 56), (Display of "specific image 31e")) can be executed.
Prior to the predetermined timing for notifying the result of the jackpot determination (for example, (a) T12 in FIG. 52) → the first suggestion notification effect (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 notification period") and the first suggestion effect (for example, " Pseudo-ream 2 variable period ") may be executed.
After a predetermined timing for notifying the result of the jackpot determination (for example, (a) T12 in FIG. 52) → a second suggestion notification effect (for example, display of the specific image 31e) and a second suggestion effect (for example, “temporary stop”) (Temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "display period") may be executed.
When the first suggestion notification effect (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 notification period") is executed → the advance notice effect (for example, the dialogue advance notice effect) can be executed.
When the second suggestion notification effect (for example, display of the specific image 31e) is executed → The advance notice effect (for example, the dialogue advance notice effect) is not executed.
There is such a feature.
As a result, in the phase of improving the expectation for the big hit, the expectation for the big hit can be further improved by simultaneously executing other notice effects.
Further, in the phase of preventing the excessive expectation for the jackpot from being improved, it is possible to maintain the prevention of increasing the excessive expectation for the jackpot by not executing the other advance notice effects at the same time.

That is,
In the variable production
Suggestion effect according to the result of jackpot judgment (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation period", "normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "total rotation fluctuation period", "provisional" Temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "stop display period") and
Suggestion notification effect that predicts that the suggestion effect will be executed (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 notification period", "pseudo-ream 3 notification period", "reach!" Selection of options in "notice effect" (for example, selection of "SP" in FIG. 56), display of step-up notice effect image 31p in "SU notice effect" (for example, display of "correct SU5 full rotation" in FIG. 56), (Display of "specific image 31e")) can be executed.
Prior to the predetermined timing for notifying the result of the jackpot determination (for example, (a) T12 in FIG. 52) → the first suggestion notification effect (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 notification period") and the first suggestion effect (for example, " A first effect (for example, a pseudo-ream 2 effect), a second suggestion notification effect (for example, a "pseudo-ream 3 notification period"), and a second suggestion effect (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 execution period") in combination with the pseudo-ream 2 execution period. It is possible to execute the second effect (for example, the pseudo-ream 3 effect) in combination with the "pseudo-ream 3 execution period").
After a predetermined timing for notifying the result of the jackpot determination (for example, (a) T12 in FIG. 52) → A third suggestion notification effect (for example, display of the specific image 31e) and a third suggestion effect (for example, “temporary stop”) It is possible to execute a third effect (for example, a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect) in combination with the effect symbol 38 in the "display period".
The ratio of executing the first effect and the third effect and the ratio of executing the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are different (for example, the variable effect patterns 3, 9, 14 in FIG. 53, When the number of pseudo-reams of 15 is 1 (pseudo-ream 2 effect), the pseudo-ream may be executed but the specific image 31e may not be displayed as in the variation effect pattern 3, but the variation effect patterns 10-12, 16-18 Since the specific image 31e is displayed in any of the variable effect patterns when the number of pseudo-reams is 2 (pseudo-ream 3 effect), only the 1st effect is executed when the 1st effect and the 2nd effect are executed. The rate at which the third effect is executed is higher than when the third effect is performed).
There is such a feature.
As a result, even if the production content is complicated by the execution of SP reach or the like, it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach production has ended as a loss.

That is,
In the variable production
Suggestion effect according to the result of jackpot judgment (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation period", "normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "total rotation fluctuation period", "provisional" Temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "stop display period") and
Suggestion notification effect that predicts that the suggestion effect will be executed (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 notification period", "pseudo-ream 3 notification period", "reach!" Selection of options in "notice effect" (for example, selection of "SP" in FIG. 56), display of step-up notice effect image 31p in "SU notice effect" (for example, display of "correct SU5 full rotation" in FIG. 56), (Display of "specific image 31e")) can be executed.
Prior to the predetermined timing for notifying the result of the jackpot determination (for example, (a) T12 in FIG. 52) → the first suggestion notification effect (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 notification period", "pseudo-ream 3 notification period") and the first It is possible to execute the first effect (for example, pseudo-ream 2 effect, pseudo-ream 3 effect) in combination with the suggestion effect of 1 (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 execution period", "pseudo-ream 3 execution period").
After a predetermined timing for notifying the result of the jackpot determination (for example, (a) T12 in FIG. 52) → a second suggestion notification effect (for example, display of the specific image 31e) and a second suggestion effect (for example, background switching effect) And a second effect (for example, a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect) in combination with the temporary stop display effect) can be executed.
The ratio of executing the first effect and the second effect when the result of the jackpot judgment is lost and the ratio of executing the first effect and the second effect when the result of the jackpot judgment is a big hit are different (for example). In FIG. 53, the variation effect patterns 7 to 18 are variation effect patterns that display the specific image 31e when the image is lost, and the variation effect pattern 30 is the variation effect pattern that displays the specific image 31e when the jackpot is a big hit. Therefore, the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed in the case of a loss than in the case of a big hit).
There is such a feature.
This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the display of the "specific image" = the result of the jackpot judgment was a loss, and the display of the "specific image" makes the player recognize that the reach effect has ended due to a loss. It can be made easier.

That is,
In the variable production
Suggestion effect according to the result of jackpot judgment (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation period", "normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "total rotation fluctuation period", "provisional" Temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "stop display period") and
Suggestion notification effect that predicts that the suggestion effect will be executed (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 notification period", "pseudo-ream 3 notification period", "reach!" Selection of options in "notice effect" (for example, selection of "SP" in FIG. 56), display of step-up notice effect image 31p in "SU notice effect" (for example, display of "correct SU5 full rotation" in FIG. 56), (Display of "specific image 31e")) can be executed.
Prior to the predetermined timing for notifying the result of the jackpot determination (for example, (a) T12 in FIG. 52) → the first suggestion notification effect (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 notification period") and the first suggestion effect (for example, " It is possible to execute an effect (for example, a pseudo-ream 2 effect) consisting of a pseudo-ream 2 variation period).
After a predetermined timing for notifying the result of the jackpot determination (for example, (a) T12 in FIG. 52) → a second suggestion notification effect (for example, display of the specific image 31e) and a second suggestion effect (for example, “temporary stop”) It is possible to execute an effect (for example, a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect) including the effect symbol 38 in the "display period".
And the execution time of the above-mentioned production is different.
There is such a feature.
Thereby, for example, in the "first suggestion notification effect" to the "first suggestion effect" performed before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, the expectation for the jackpot can be maintained.
On the other hand, for example, in the "second suggestion notification effect" to the "second suggestion effect" performed after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to prevent the excessive expectation for the jackpot from being improved. it can.

Next, the fourth feature portion related to the specific image will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61.
In addition, in FIGS. 58 to 61, the description is omitted because it mainly refers to the pattern fanning effect, but the contents described in FIGS. 42 to 46 and the contents described in FIGS. 47 to 51 are described. The contents and the contents described in FIGS. 52 to 57 can be used in combination as appropriate.

FIG. 58A is a table showing the distribution of the effect symbol 38 (at the time of normal reach loss), and the table is stored in, for example, the sub ROM 120b. For example, in the sub CPU 120a, the stop special symbol data indicated by the effect symbol designation command is "00" based on the received effect symbol designation command and the variation pattern designation command, and the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command is "00". In the case of "variation pattern 4", it is determined which effect symbol 38 is used for the reach effect to be lost by referring to the table at the time of normal reach loss shown in FIG. 58 (a).

As shown in FIG. 58 (a), the distribution ratio of "1 symbol" is "10%", and that of "2 symbols" is "20%", and "3". The distribution ratio of "design" is "5%", the distribution ratio of "4 symbols" is "15%", and the distribution ratio of "5 symbols" is "10%". "6 symbols" has a distribution ratio of "15%", "7 symbols" has a non-selected distribution ratio, and "8 symbols" has a distribution ratio of "15%". It is "15%", and the distribution ratio of "9 symbols" is "10%".

FIG. 58B is a table showing the distribution of the effect symbol 38 (when the SP reach or more is lost), and the table is stored in, for example, the sub ROM 120b. For example, in the sub CPU 120a, the stop special symbol data indicated by the effect symbol designation command is "00" based on the received effect symbol designation command and the variation pattern designation command, and the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command is "00". If it is any of "variation patterns 5 to 10", refer to the table at the time of loss of SP reach or more shown in FIG. 58 (b), and determine which effect symbol 38 is used for the reach effect to be lost. decide.

As shown in FIG. 58 (b), the distribution ratio of "1 symbol" is "10%", and that of "2 symbols" is "15%", and "3". The distribution ratio of "design" is "9%", the distribution ratio of "4 symbols" is "15%", and the distribution ratio of "5 symbols" is "10%". "6 symbols" has a distribution ratio of "15%", "7 symbols" has a distribution ratio of "1%", and "8 symbols" has a distribution ratio. The fraction ratio is "15%", and the distribution ratio of "9 symbols" is "10%".

For example, in the case of a loss, the normal reach by "7 symbols" is not executed, and there is room for the SP reach or more by "7 symbols" to be executed. Therefore, when the reach state is reached by "7 symbols", the SP reach or more is always executed. Is done.
As shown in FIG. 33, if the player loses the SP reach or higher, the "specific image" is displayed. Therefore, when the reach state is reached with "7 symbols", the SP reach or higher is always performed and the specific image is always specified. It can be said that it involves the display of an image.

On the other hand, for example, in the case of a loss, if the reach state is reached with "6 symbols", there is a possibility of either "normal reach" or "SP or higher reach". That is, in the case of "6 symbols", there are cases where the "normal reach" ends and the "specific image" is not displayed, and there are cases where the "SP or higher reach" is executed and the "specific image" is displayed. ..

That is, in the case of a loss, when the "6 symbols" are in the reach state and when the "7 symbols" are in the reach state, the "7 symbols" are always accompanied by the display of the "specific image". , "Specific image" tends to be displayed easily.
The distribution in FIG. 58 can be changed as appropriate according to the tendency. For example, "7 symbols" may be selected at the time of normal reach loss.

Here, in order to facilitate the understanding of FIG. 58, the display modes of (a) “6 symbols” in the reach state and (b) “7 symbols” in the reach state are shown. A supplementary explanation will be given using 59 animations.
FIG. 59 shows only the image display device 31 extracted, and each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as the content described in FIG. 43 and the like, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, in FIG. 59, the temporary stop display is omitted.

(A) is the time when the reach state is reached with "6 symbols", and in this case, as shown in (N1), when the normal reach is lost (the specific image 31e is not displayed) and (SP1-1). As shown in, there are cases where the SP reach or more is lost. If the loss is equal to or greater than the SP reach, the specific image 31e is displayed as shown in (SP1-2).

(B) is the case where the reach state is reached with "7 symbols", and in this case, there is only a case where the SP reach or more is lost. That is, as shown in (SP1-2), there is only a case where the specific image 31e is displayed.
Therefore, in the case of a loss, when the "6 symbols" are in the reach state and when the "7 symbols" are in the reach state, the "7 symbols" are always accompanied by the display of the "specific image". , "Specific image" tends to be displayed easily.

FIG. 60A is a table showing the distribution of the effect symbol 38 when the symbol fanning is successful, and the table is stored in, for example, the sub ROM 120b. For example, the sub CPU 120a has determined one of "variable effect pattern 8", "variable effect pattern 20", and "variable effect pattern 27" (variable effect pattern including successful pattern fanning in the effect configuration) as the variable effect pattern. In the case, referring to the table showing the distribution of the effect symbol 38 when the symbol fanning is successful as shown in FIG. 60A, it is determined which effect symbol 38 is used to perform the symbol fanning to bring it into the reach state. ..

As shown in FIG. 60 (a), the distribution ratio of "1 symbol" is "12%", and that of "2 symbols" is "12%", and "3". The distribution ratio of "design" is "12%", the distribution ratio of "4 symbols" is "12%", and the distribution ratio of "5 symbols" is "12%". "6 symbols" has a distribution ratio of "12%", "7 symbols" has a distribution ratio of "4%", and "8 symbols" has a distribution ratio. The distribution ratio is "12%", and the distribution ratio of "9 symbols" is "12%".

FIG. 60B is a table showing the distribution of the effect symbol 38 when the symbol fanning fails, and the table is stored in, for example, the sub ROM 120b. For example, when the sub CPU 120a determines "variable effect pattern 2" (variable effect pattern including a symbol fanning failure in the effect configuration) as the variable effect pattern, the effect symbol at the time of the symbol fanning failure shown in FIG. 60 (b). With reference to the table showing the distribution of 38, it is determined which effect symbol 38 is used to perform the symbol fanning.

As shown in FIG. 60 (b), the distribution ratio of "1 symbol" is "10%", and that of "2 symbols" is "10%", and "3". The distribution ratio of "design" is "10%", the distribution ratio of "4 symbols" is "10%", and the distribution ratio of "5 symbols" is "10%". "6 symbols" has a distribution ratio of "10%", "7 symbols" has a distribution ratio of "20%", and "8 symbols" has a distribution ratio of "10%". The fraction ratio is "10%", and the distribution ratio of "9 symbols" is "10%".

That is, the "7 symbols" tend to be more prone to symbol fanning failure and less likely to be symbol fanning success than other symbols. For example, in the case of "6 symbols", as compared with "7 symbols", the reach state is more likely to be formed when the symbol fanning effect occurs because the symbol fanning success is more likely to occur.
Further, the variation effect pattern in which the symbol is successfully fanned at the time of loss is the "variation effect pattern 8", and the "variation effect pattern 8" is a variation effect pattern accompanied by the display of a specific image.
Therefore, when the symbol fanning effect using "6 symbols" occurs, there is a possibility that the "variable effect pattern 8" is executed as compared with the case where the symbol fanning effect using "7 symbols" occurs. It is expensive and tends to display a specific image easily.
The distribution in FIG. 60 can be changed as appropriate according to the tendency. For example, "7 symbols" may be selected evenly with other symbols, or "7 symbols" may be selected more easily than other symbols when the symbol is successfully fanned, and when the symbol fanning fails, etc. It may be more difficult to select than the design of.
Further, the "odd number symbol" may be easier to select than the "even number symbol" when the symbol fanning is successful, and may be more difficult to select than the "even number symbol" when the symbol fanning fails. Further, the "even numbered symbol" and the "odd numbered symbol" may have an opposite relationship.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding of FIG. 60, a display example of a symbol fanning failure by "7 symbols" and a display example of a symbol fanning success by "7 symbols" will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. 61.
FIG. 61 shows only the image display device 31 extracted, and since each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as the content described in FIG. 43 and the like, the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, in FIG. 61, the temporary stop display is omitted.

In the case of failure of symbol fanning, in (a), "7 symbols" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the left effect symbol 38a, and "7 symbols" are slowly descended from the upper part of the screen toward the temporary stop display position as the right effect symbol 38c. However, it is fueling whether or not to stop at the temporary stop display position. At this time, the voice output device 32 also outputs a sound effect of "gogogo ♪" that encourages whether or not the "7 symbols" of the right effect symbol 38c stops at the temporary stop display position.

Then, in (b), the sound effect changes (changes to a sound effect of "Gowan ♪"), further fueling whether or not "7 symbols" of the right effect symbol 38c stops at the temporary stop display position. As described in FIG. 58, it is difficult to select the "7 symbols" when the player loses more than the SP reach. Therefore, when the "7 symbols" are in the reach state, the expectation for the jackpot is considerably improved. Therefore, when the symbol has such a position, the symbol fanning effect is an effective effect for improving the game entertainment.

Then, in (c), a sound effect such as "squat" is output from the voice output device 32, and at the same time, a state in which "7 symbols" of the right effect symbol 38c is moved to the lower part of the screen is displayed. That is, it indicates that the same symbol as "7 symbols" as the left effect symbol 38a was not temporarily stopped and displayed at the temporary stop display position as the right effect symbol 38c, that is, the symbol fanning failed.

Then, in (d), "8 symbols" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the right effect symbol 38c, indicating that the reach state has not been reached.

Next, in the case of successful symbol fanning, in (a) and (b), the same as in the case of failure of symbol fanning, but in (c), a sound effect such as "Kakeen ♪" is output from the voice output device 32, and at the same time, The "7 symbols" of the right effect symbol 38c are temporarily stopped and displayed at the temporary stop display position, that is, it indicates that the symbol has been successfully fanned. Then, in (d), "7 symbols" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the right effect symbol 38c, indicating that the reach state has been reached.

It should be noted that the gaming state in which FIGS. 58 to 61 are executed does not matter. For example, it may be applied in all gaming states or in some gaming states.

(Summary of FIGS. 58 to 61)
That is, FIGS. 58 to 61 have the following features.

That is,
When the result of the jackpot determination is a loss (for example, step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process is denied),
A reach effect (variable effect pattern) using the first specific symbol (for example, the effect symbol 38 of 6 symbols) accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e, and a second specific symbol (for example, the effect symbol 38) accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e. The execution ratio is different from the reach effect (variable effect pattern) using the effect symbol 38) of 6 symbols (for example, when the jackpot determination process is lost, the 6 symbols are selected even at the time of normal reach, so that the specific image is specified. Although 31e may not be displayed, the specific image 31e is displayed because 7 symbols are selected only when the SP reach or higher. Therefore, when 6 symbols reach and 7 symbols reach. The ratio at which the specific image 31e is displayed is different from that in the case of ().
There is such a feature.
As a result, the ratio of displaying the specific image differs depending on the symbol (directed symbol 38), so that the game entertainment can be improved.

That is,
Using the first specific symbol (for example, the effect symbol 38 of 6 symbols), the first suggestive effect of whether or not to make a reach effect (for example, a symbol fanning effect that encourages whether or not to make a reach with 6 symbols). And when
Using the second specific symbol (for example, the effect symbol 38 of the 7 symbols), the second suggestive effect of whether or not to make the reach effect (for example, the symbol fanning effect that incites whether or not the reach is made by the 7 symbols). May be executed.
After executing the first suggestion effect with the display of the specific image 31e and then the reach effect (variation effect pattern) and the second suggestion effect with the display of the specific image 31e. The execution ratio is different from the variable effect (variable effect pattern) that executes the reach effect (for example, 6 symbols are more likely to succeed in the symbol fanning effect than the 7 symbols, and the 7 symbols are more likely to succeed in the symbol fanning effect than the 6 symbols. Therefore, 6 symbols are more likely to reach than 7 symbols, and the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed because 6 symbols are more likely to reach. The ratio of displaying the specific image 31e is different from that of the design fanning effect, which encourages whether or not to reach with the symbol).
There is such a feature.
As a result, the ratio of displaying the specific image differs depending on the symbol, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Next, a fifth feature portion related to the specific image will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 67.
In addition, in FIGS. 62 to 67, since the operation promotion image is mainly referred to, the description is omitted, but the contents described in FIGS. 42 to 46 and the contents described in FIGS. 47 to 51 are described. The contents described above, the contents described in FIGS. 52 to 57, and the contents described in FIGS. 58 to 61 can be used in appropriate combinations.

FIG. 62 shows a display example of the operation promotion image in the present embodiment.
FIG. 62 shows only the image display device 31 extracted, and since each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as the content described in FIG. 43 and the like, the description thereof will be omitted.

The "first operation promotion image" refers to an operation promotion image in which the effect button 35 is in a non-protruding state and corresponds to the state, as shown by 31q. Therefore, even in the operation promotion image, an image showing a state in which the image does not project upward is displayed.
The "second operation promotion image" refers to an operation promotion image in which the effect button 35 is in a protruding state and corresponds to the state, as shown by 31r. Therefore, even in the operation promotion image, an image showing the state of projecting upward is displayed.

Note that (a) to (e) show the flow from the display of the operation promotion image to the confirmation stop display, and in particular, in (c), it shows that the specific image 31e is displayed.
That is, the specific image 31e can be displayed and the common specific image 31e is displayed in both the variation effect in which the first operation promotion image 31q is displayed and the variation effect in which the second operation promotion image 31r is displayed. It will be.
As a result, the variation effect in which the second operation promotion image 31r is displayed does not mean that the special specific image 31e is displayed, but the variation effect in which the second operation promotion image 31r is displayed. However, it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach production has ended due to a loss.
Further, it is not necessary to prepare the specific image 31e for the first operation promotion image 31q and the second operation promotion image 31r, respectively, which leads to a reduction in the used area of the CGROM 156.

In FIG. 62, as an example of the "first operation promotion image" and the "second operation promotion image", an image in which the effect button 35 is in a non-protruding state and an image in which the effect button 35 is in a projecting state are used. As described above, any mode may be used as long as the "first operation promotion image" and the "second operation promotion image" have different expectations for the jackpot.
For example, in a gaming machine in which the effect button 35 is not in a protruding state, an image in which the effect button 35 is in a non-projecting state and is in a normal color (for example, blue) is designated as a "first operation promotion image", and the effect button 35 is used. An image in which is in a non-protruding state and has a color different from the normal color (for example, red) may be applied as a “second operation promotion image”.
Further, in a gaming machine having another operation means (the above-mentioned effect lever) in addition to the effect button 35, the image corresponding to the effect button 35 is designated as a "first operation promotion image" and another operation means (the above-mentioned effect lever). The image corresponding to the above-mentioned effect lever) may be applied as a "second operation promotion image".

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the displayable operation promotion image and the executable timing for each variation effect pattern at the time of loss will be described.
It should be noted that the description of "decision" in the corresponding effect corresponds to the notification period for notifying the result of the jackpot determination (for example, in FIG. 42, (c) T4 to (c) T5).
That is, during the notification period for notifying the result of the jackpot determination, the player can be made to operate the effect button 35 (if not operated, after a lapse of a predetermined time), the result of the jackpot determination can be notified.
In the following, "decision" may be referred to as "decision production".
Further, the "decision effect" is to let the player operate the effect button 35 (if it is not operated, after a lapse of a predetermined time) to notify the result of the jackpot determination, and to operate the effect button 35 to the player. It may be possible to provide both a notification of the result of the jackpot determination in a feasible manner, or to provide only one of them in a feasible manner.

For example, in the case of the variation effect pattern 1, the first operation promotion image is defined as a displayable (executable) operation promotion image, and the variation start time is defined as the executable timing. Furthermore, as a corresponding production, a dialogue notice production is stipulated.
That is, in the case of the variation effect pattern 1, the first operation promotion image is displayed at the start of the variation, and if the effect button 35 is operated, the dialogue advance notice effect is executed.

For example, in the case of the variation effect pattern 7, the first operation promotion image is defined as a displayable (executable) operation promotion image, and the change start time and SP reach time are defined as the executable timing. .. Furthermore, as corresponding effects, a dialogue notice effect and a decision effect are stipulated.
That is, in the case of the variation effect pattern 7, the first operation promotion image is displayed at the start of the variation, and if the effect button 35 is operated, the dialogue advance notice effect is executed, and the first operation promotion image is again performed at the time of the determination effect. Is displayed, and if the effect button 35 is operated, the result of the jackpot determination is notified.

For example, in the case of the variation effect pattern 12, the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image are defined as displayable (executable) operation promotion images, and the executable timings are the start of variation and SP reach. The time is specified. Furthermore, as corresponding effects, a dialogue notice effect and a decision effect are stipulated.
That is, in the case of the variation effect pattern 12, the first operation promotion image is displayed at the start of the variation, the dialogue notice effect is executed by operating the effect button 35, and the second operation promotion image is displayed at the time of the determination effect. Then, if the effect button 35 is operated, the result of the jackpot determination is notified.

For example, in the case of the variation effect pattern 16, the first operation promotion image is defined as a displayable (executable) operation promotion image, and the executable timings are the variation start time, the SP reach time, and the SPSP reach time. It is stipulated. Furthermore, as corresponding effects, a dialogue notice effect and a decision effect are stipulated.
That is, in the case of the variation effect pattern 16, the first operation promotion image is displayed at the start of the variation, and if the effect button 35 is operated, the dialogue notice effect is executed, and the second operation is performed again at the time of the determined effect at the time of SP reach. 1 When the operation promotion image is displayed and the effect button 35 is operated, the result of the jackpot determination is notified (in this case, a draw effect occurs and develops into SPSP reach), and the decision effect at the time of SPSP reach is performed again. , The first operation promotion image is displayed, and if the effect button 35 is operated, the result of the jackpot determination is notified.

For example, in the case of the variation effect pattern 18, the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image are defined as displayable (executable) operation promotion images, and the executable timings are the start of variation and the SPSP reach. The time is specified. Furthermore, as corresponding effects, a dialogue notice effect and a decision effect are stipulated.
That is, in the case of the variation effect pattern 18, the first operation promotion image is displayed at the start of the variation, and if the effect button 35 is operated, the dialogue notice effect is executed, and the second operation is performed at the time of the determined effect at the time of SPSP reach. It is shown that the promotion image is displayed and the result of the jackpot determination is notified by operating the effect button 35.
Since the same applies to other variable effect patterns, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the corresponding effect is not limited to the dialogue notice effect and the determined effect, and other effects may be applied as long as the effect involves the operation of the effect button 35.

That is, the loss variation effect patterns include a variation effect pattern in which the first operation promotion image is displayed during the variation effect, a variation effect pattern in which the first operation promotion image is displayed a plurality of times, and a first operation promotion image. It also has a variation effect pattern accompanied by a display of a second operation promotion image.
Further, in the variation effect (variation effect patterns 1 to 3, 5 to 18) in which the first operation promotion image is displayed at least once during the variation effect, the variation effect pattern (variation effect pattern 7) accompanied by the display of a specific image. ~ 18) and variation effect patterns (variation effect patterns 1, 3, 5, 6) that do not involve the display of a specific image, whereas variations that accompany the display of the second operation promotion image during the variation effect. The effects (variable effect patterns 12, 18) include only the variable effect patterns (variable effect patterns 12, 18) accompanied by the display of a specific image. That is, when the second operation promotion image is displayed during the variation effect, the specific image is not displayed.
As a result, even when the loss is notified with the display of the second operation promotion image, it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended due to the loss by displaying the specific image.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the correspondence relationship between the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image at SP reach or higher (at the time of loss) will be described.
FIG. 64A is an excerpt of a variation effect pattern (variation effect pattern 7 to 18) of loss of SP reach or more of loss.
That is, each variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern accompanied by display of a specific image.

(A) shows the correspondence relationship between the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image at SP reach or higher (at the time of loss), and shows the relationship with the operation promotion image displayed in the determined effect in each variation effect pattern. Shown.
That is, the first operation promotion image defines the variation effect patterns 7 to 11 and 13 to 17, whereas the second operation promotion image defines the variation effect patterns 12 and 18. Further, in the variation effect pattern 12, the distribution ratio when the variation pattern 7 is determined is "10%", and in the variation effect pattern 18, the distribution ratio when the variation pattern 10 is determined is "10%". Therefore, it can be said that it is a variable production pattern that is difficult to be selected.

(B) shows a comparison of the appearance rates of the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image having SP reach or higher (loss). For example, the operation promotion image displayed in the determined effect is the first operation promotion image. In the variation effect pattern, the overall distribution is "580/600", whereas in the variation effect pattern in which the operation promotion image displayed in the determined effect is the second operation promotion image, the total distribution is Is "20/600". That is, the appearance rate at the time of loss of SP reach or higher is "29/30" for the first operation promotion image and "1/30" for the second operation promotion image. That is, when the SP reach or higher is lost, the first operation promotion image is more likely to be displayed than the second operation promotion image in the determined effect.
That is, it can be said that it is more difficult to appear when the second operation promotion image is displayed and the specific image is displayed than when the first operation promotion image is displayed and the specific image is displayed.
In addition, it may be configured that the first operation promotion image is displayed and the specific image is displayed more difficult to appear than the second operation promotion image is displayed and the specific image is displayed.

Further, in the SP reach or higher, the first operation promotion image is more likely to be notified of the loss than the second operation promotion image in the determined effect, in other words, the second operation promoted image is the second in the determined effect. 1 The relationship is such that the jackpot is more easily notified than the operation promotion image.
That is, the first operation promotion image has a relatively low jackpot expectation, and the second operation promotion image has a relatively high jackpot expectation.
Therefore, it can be said that the variation effect pattern accompanied by the display of the specific image is more likely to appear when the first operation promotion image is displayed, and less likely to appear when the second operation promotion image is displayed.
In addition, in the case of loss of SP reach or higher, the possibility of loss is higher when the first operation promotion image is displayed than when the second operation promotion image is displayed, so that the first operation promotion image is displayed. It can be said that the specific image is more likely to be displayed in the case where the second operation promotion image is displayed than in the case where the second operation promotion image is displayed.
It should be noted that the case where the second operation promotion image is displayed may be configured so that the specific image is more easily displayed than the case where the first operation promotion image is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a comparison between the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state will be described. Note that FIG. 65 (a) is a diagram simply showing the percentage of loss and jackpot when the first operation promotion image or the second operation promotion image is displayed in the determined effect of SP reach or higher, and FIG. 65 (a) b) is a diagram simply showing the percentage of loss and jackpot when the second operation promotion image is displayed in the determined effect of SP reach or higher.

(A) is a comparison between the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state. In the high-probability gaming state, when the SP reach or higher is achieved, the first operation promotion image or the second operation promotion image is displayed in the determined effect. The rate of loss is "10/100", and the rate of big hits is "90/100". On the other hand, in the low-probability gaming state, when the SP reach or higher is achieved, the ratio of the first operation promotion image or the second operation promotion image displayed in the determined effect and the loss is "70/100", which is a big hit ratio. Is "30/100".
That is, when the high-probability gaming state reaches the determined effect with SP reach or higher (when one of the operation promotion images is displayed in the determined effect), it is likely to be a big hit, and the low-probability gaming state is the SP. When the decision effect is reached with the reach or higher (when one of the operation promotion images is displayed in the decision effect), there is a tendency that the loss is likely to occur.
That is, the specific image is displayed because the operation promotion image is more likely to be lost when the operation promotion image is displayed in the decision effect in the low probability game state than when the operation promotion image is displayed in the decision effect in the high probability game state. It can be said that it is easy.

The selection ratio shown in FIG. 65 (a) is only an example and can be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the high-probability gaming state, if there is a loss, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100", and in the high-probability gaming state, if there is a big hit, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100".
Further, for example, in the high-probability gaming state, the selection ratio may be set to "70/100" when there is a loss, and in the high-probability gaming state, the selection ratio may be set to "30/100" when there is a big hit.
Further, for example, in the low-probability gaming state, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100" when there is a loss, and in the low-probability gaming state, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100" when there is a big hit.
Further, for example, in the low-probability gaming state, the selection ratio may be set to "70/100" when there is a loss, and in the low-probability gaming state, the selection ratio may be set to "30/100" when there is a big hit.

(B) is a comparison when the operation promotion image displayed in the decision effect is the second operation promotion image, and in the high probability gaming state, when the SP reach or more, the second operation in the decision effect. The rate at which the promotion image is displayed and the result is lost is "1/100", and the rate at which the jackpot is displayed is "99/100". On the other hand, in the low-probability gaming state, when the SP reach or higher is achieved, the rate at which the second operation promotion image is displayed and the loss occurs is "20/100", and the rate at which the jackpot is a big hit is "80/100". Is.
That is, in any of the gaming states, if the second operation promotion image is displayed in the deciding effect, the jackpot tends to be notified easily, but in the high-probability gaming state, the deciding effect is reached with SP reach or higher. In the case (when the second operation promotion image is displayed in the decision effect), it is easy to get a big hit, and when the low probability game state reaches the decision effect with SP reach or higher (the second operation promotion image is displayed in the decision effect) If it is done), there is a tendency that it is more likely to be lost compared to the high-probability gaming state.
That is, the case where the second operation promotion image is displayed in the low-probability gaming state is more likely to be lost than the case where the second operation promotion image is displayed in the low-probability gaming state. It can be said that the image is easy to display.

The selection ratio shown in FIG. 65 (b) is only an example and can be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the high-probability gaming state, if there is a loss, the selection ratio may be set to "30/100", and in the high-probability gaming state, if there is a big hit, the selection ratio may be set to "70/100". In the probability game state, if there is a loss, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100", and in the high probability game state, if there is a big hit, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100".
Further, for example, in the low-probability gaming state, the selection ratio may be set to "40/100" when there is a loss, and in the low-probability gaming state, the selection ratio may be set to "60/100" when there is a big hit. In the low-probability gaming state, if there is a loss, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100", and in the low-probability gaming state, if there is a big hit, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100".

Next, the number of vibrations of the effect button and the executable timing for each variation effect pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 66, 67, and 75.
In FIG. 66, “start” indicates the start time of the variation effect, that is, the effect button 35 vibrates at the start of the variation effect. Further, "decision" indicates a determination effect of SP reach or higher, and indicates that the effect button 35 vibrates after the determination effect, for example, at the timing T0 shown in FIG. 67.
In addition, in FIG. 66, a variable effect pattern accompanied by an operation of the effect button 35 is extracted with a determined effect of SP reach or higher.

As shown in FIG. 66, when the number of vibrations of the effect button is lost, the vibration at the “start” is possible, but the vibration at the “decision” is not possible. Specifically, in the variable effect patterns 12, 16 to 18, the effect button 35 vibrates at the "start", and the effect button 35 does not vibrate at the "decision". In the other variable effect pattern of loss, the effect button 35 does not vibrate in both "start" and "decision".
On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, both the vibration at the "start" and the vibration at the "decision" are possible. Specifically, in the variable effect patterns 19 to 24, 26, 27, and 30, the effect button 35 does not vibrate in the "start", but the effect button 35 vibrates in the "decision". Further, in the variable effect patterns 25, 28, 29, and 31, the effect button 35 vibrates in both the "start" and the "decision".
Therefore, in the case of loss, the effect button 35 can vibrate "0" times or "1" times in 1 variation effect, and in the case of a big hit, the effect button 35 is "1" in 1 variation effect. It can vibrate once or "2" times.
That is, it is more difficult to display a specific image when the number of vibrations of the effect button 35 is large (big hit = 1 or 2 times) than when it is small (loss = 0 times or 1 time). It is easy to display).

Note that FIG. 66 merely shows the number of vibrations of the effect button simply, and the number of vibrations can be changed as appropriate if the above tendency is followed. For example, there may be more points to vibrate in the variation effect of 1. For example, it may be vibrated in the middle of the fluctuation effect (for example, when shifting to SP reach).
FIG. 75 is a specific example thereof. In addition, in FIG. 75, as described above, “on the way” corresponds to the middle stage of the variable effect (for example, when shifting to SP reach) and the like.
As shown in FIG. 75, from the viewpoint of the "number of times" of vibration, in the case of a big hit, it is configured to vibrate at least once by "decision", and "start", "on the way", Since the variable effect pattern that vibrates in all of the "decisions" is also provided, the effect button 35 is more likely to vibrate than in the case of loss, as in FIG. 66.
Therefore, as in FIG. 66, it is more difficult to display a specific image when the number of vibrations of the effect button 35 is large (big hit = 1 to 3 times) than when it is small (loss = 0 to 2 times) (loss). Loss is easier to display).
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 75, depending on the variation effect pattern, there is a case where the number of vibrations is larger in the case of loss than in the case of big hit.
For example, the fluctuation effect patterns 15, 17, and 18 of the loss vibrate at the “start” and the “midway”, respectively, so that the number of vibrations is two. On the other hand, since the fluctuation effect patterns 19, 20, and 21 of the jackpot vibrate only by "decision", the number of vibrations is one. Therefore, there may be a case where the specific image is more likely to be displayed when the number of vibrations of the effect button 35 is large (loss = 2 times) than when the number of vibrations is small (big hit = 1 time).
In other words, if it vibrates with "decision", it will be a big hit, so the degree of expectation for the big hit is "decision">"start" ≒ "on the way", and from the viewpoint of "timing" to vibrate.
(B) When vibrating according to the "decision" (the number of vibrations is one), for example, "variation effect pattern 19"
(B) When vibrating other than "decision" (the number of vibrations is 2), for example, "variation effect pattern 18"
As in (b) above, even if the number of vibrations in (a) above is exceeded, the specific image is more likely to be displayed in (b) above.
As described above, the relationship between the number of vibrations and the display ratio of the specific image is seen between the case of looking at the "number of times" of vibration as shown in FIG. 66 and the case of looking at the "timing" of vibration as shown in FIG. May change.

FIG. 67 is a time chart 7 showing the timing of vibrating the effect button 35.
As an example in which the effect button 35 does not vibrate, (a) a variable effect pattern 7 will be used, and as an example in which the effect button 35 vibrates, (b) a variable effect pattern 21 will be used.

(A) is the variation effect pattern 7, and immediately before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination of the timing T0, for example, the operation promotion image shown in FIG. 62 is displayed (button image + press! Is displayed). In addition, just before the timing to notify the result of the jackpot judgment of timing T0, press the button image +! The effect of displaying is the above-mentioned "decision effect".
Then, at the timing T0, it is notified that the result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

Then, from the timing T1 to the timing T2, the specific image is displayed for 2S, and then the transitions to the "temporary stop display period" and the "fixed stop display period", but the effect button 35 vibrates until the timing T4. It is designed not to.
That is, the effect button 35 does not vibrate in the variable effect pattern of loss.

(B) is the variation effect pattern 21, and immediately before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination of the timing T0, for example, the operation promotion image shown in FIG. 62 is displayed (button image + press! Is displayed).
Then, at the timing T0, it is notified that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.
Then, at the timing T0, the jackpot notification is performed, and the effect button 35 vibrates until the timing T3.
As a result, the mood of the player who is uplifted by the big hit can be further uplifted.
The specific image is not displayed until the timing T3.
That is, in the jackpot variation effect pattern, for example, the effect button 35 vibrates at the timing T0 for notifying the result of the jackpot determination.
In the above example, the mode in which the effect button 35 is vibrated has been described, but the mode is not limited to vibration, and other modes may be used. For example, it may be a mode in which the effect button 35 is simply changed from the first position to the second position, or the effect button 35 may be changed from the first light emitting color to the second light emitting color.

It should be noted that the gaming state in which FIGS. 62 to 67 are executed does not matter. For example, it may be applied in all gaming states or in some gaming states.

In addition, in the revival effect of the variation effect pattern 30, the first operation promotion image or the second operation promotion image may be displayed.
Even if the first operation promotion image or the second operation promotion image may be displayed even after the display of the specific image 31e, the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image display the specific image 31e. The distribution may be more easily displayed before the display of the specific image 31e than after the display.

(Summary of FIGS. 62 to 67)
That is, FIGS. 62 to 67 have the following features.

That is,
The first operation promotion effect for displaying the first operation promotion image (for example, the first operation promotion image in FIG. 62) and the special game are expected to be executed more than when the first operation promotion image is executed. There is a second operation promotion effect (for example, the second operation promotion image of FIG. 62) for displaying the second operation promotion image.
A variation effect (for example, FIG. 64) for executing the first operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e and a variation effect (for example, FIG. 64) for executing the second operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e. (For example, the first operation promotion effect is easy to be executed at the time of loss, and the second operation promotion effect is difficult to be executed at the time of loss. The execution rate of the variable effect that accompanies is also different).
There is such a feature.
As a result, for example, when the first operation promotion image is executed, the specific image is often displayed and lost, while when the second operation promotion image is executed, the specific image is not displayed. It often becomes a big hit. Therefore, it can be grasped that the display of the specific image = the loss is suggested, and the result of the jackpot determination can be inferred from such a display, so that the game interest can be improved.

That is,
The first operation promotion effect for displaying the first operation promotion image (for example, the first operation promotion image in FIG. 62) and the special game are expected to be executed more than when the first operation promotion image is executed. There is a second operation promotion effect (for example, the second operation promotion image of FIG. 62) for displaying the second operation promotion image.
In both the variable effect for executing the first operation promotion effect (for example, FIGS. 62 and 63) and the variable effect for executing the second operation promotion effect (for example, FIGS. 62 and 63) (for example, the first operation). The specific image 31e can be displayed in both the variation effect accompanied by the promotion effect and the variation effect accompanied by the second operation promotion effect).
There is such a feature.
As a result, it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended as a loss in any of the variable effects.
Further, it is not necessary to prepare specific images for the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image, respectively, which leads to a reduction in the used area of the CGROM 156.

That is,
The first operation promotion effect for displaying the first operation promotion image (for example, the first operation promotion image in FIG. 62) and the special game are expected to be executed more than when the first operation promotion image is executed. There is a second operation promotion effect (for example, the second operation promotion image of FIG. 62) for displaying the second operation promotion image.
Fluctuation effect accompanied by the first operation promotion effect → The specific image 31e may or may not be displayed (for example, the variation effect pattern 7 can display the first operation promotion image, and the specific image 31e can be displayed. On the other hand, the variation effect pattern 1 can display the first operation promotion image, but does not display the specific image 31e).
Fluctuation effect accompanied by the second operation promotion effect → Display the specific image 31e (For example, the variation effect pattern 12 and the variation effect pattern 18 can display the second operation promotion image, and the specific image 31e can be displayed). ..
There is such a feature.
As a result, it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach production has ended due to a loss.

That is,
Execution of an operation promotion effect (for example, a first operation promotion effect that displays the first operation promotion image and a second operation promotion effect that displays the second operation promotion image) that encourages the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 35) It is possible to execute a determination result notification effect (for example, a determination effect) for notifying the result of the determination.
The ratio of executing the determination result notification effect (for example, determination effect) accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e in the normal game state, and the determination result notification effect (for example, determination effect) accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e in the high probability game state. ) Is different (for example, the rate of determining a jackpot in a normal gaming state (1/300) and the rate of determining a jackpot in a high-probability gaming state (1/60) are different from the normal gaming state. Since it is easier to execute the SP reach or higher of the loss, the ratio of executing the decision effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e is also different).
There is such a feature.
As a result, the appearance degree of the specific image changes depending on the game state, so that the game interest can be improved.

That is,
The first operation promotion effect for displaying the first operation promotion image (for example, the first operation promotion image in FIG. 62) and the special game are expected to be executed more than when the first operation promotion image is executed. There is a second operation promotion effect (for example, the second operation promotion image of FIG. 62) for displaying the second operation promotion image.
If the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss,
The execution ratios of the variable effect for executing the first operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e and the variable effect for executing the second operation promotion effect with the display of the specific image 31e are different (for example). , The display of the first operation promotion image is more likely to be lost than the display of the second operation promotion image, and the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed because the loss is more likely to occur. Therefore, the specific image 31e is displayed. , The variable effect that executes the specific effect using the first operation promotion effect and the variable effect that executes the specific effect using the second operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e have different execution ratios). ..
There is such a feature.
As a result, when the first operation promotion image is executed, the specific image is often displayed and lost, while when the second operation promotion image is executed, the specific image is not displayed and a big hit. Is often the case. Therefore, it can be grasped that the display of the specific image = the loss is suggested, and the result of the jackpot determination can be inferred from such a display, so that the game interest can be improved.

That is,
The first operation promotion effect for displaying the first operation promotion image (for example, the first operation promotion image in FIG. 62) and the special game are expected to be executed more than when the first operation promotion image is executed. There is a second operation promotion effect (for example, the second operation promotion image of FIG. 62) for displaying the second operation promotion image.
A variation effect for executing a second operation promotion effect accompanied by a display of a specific image 31e in a normal gaming state, and a variation effect for executing a second operation promotion effect accompanied by a display of a specific image 31e in a high-probability gaming state. The execution rate is different from the production (for example, unlike the rate of being judged as a big hit in the normal game state and the rate of being judged as a big hit in the high probability game state, the normal game state has a loss SP reach or higher. Since it is easy to execute, the variable effect of executing the specific effect using the second operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e in the first game state and the display of the specific image 31e in the second game state are displayed. The execution ratio is different from that of the variable effect that executes the specific effect using the second operation promotion effect).
There is such a feature.
As a result, the appearance degree of the specific image changes depending on the game state, so that the game interest can be improved.

That is,
During the execution of the reach effect, an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 35) (for example, a first operation promotion effect that displays the first operation promotion image and a second operation promotion effect that displays the second operation promotion image). 2 Operation promotion effect) can be executed.
The operating means (for example, the effect button 35) can be changed from the first mode (for example, the non-vibrating mode) to the second mode (for example, the vibrating mode).
The number of times the operation means (for example, the effect button 35) is set to the second mode (for example, the vibrating mode) is the first number (for example, 0 times), and the operation means (for example, the effect button 35) is the first. The ratio of displaying the specific image 31e is different from the case where the number of times of setting the two modes (for example, the vibrating mode) is the second number (for example, once) (for example, in the case of loss, the effect button 35 In the case of a big hit, the number of vibrations of the effect button 35 is 1 and the number of vibrations is 0, so that the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed due to the loss. Therefore, the ratio at which the specific image 31e is displayed differs between the case where the operating means is not vibrated and the case where the operating means is vibrated).
There is such a feature.
As a result, it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended due to the display of the specific image and the number of vibrations of the effect button 35.

Next, the related feature portions will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 74.
The description of the display elements of the image display device 31 that are the same as those described in FIG. 43 will be omitted.

FIG. 68 shows a display example of the image display device 31 during the variable display, particularly when the “volume adjustment” is performed at the timing when the specific image 31e is displayed.
In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, "volume adjustment" can be performed by the cross-shaped button 36 even during the variable display or the waiting state for customers.
Then, when the "volume adjustment" is performed, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the level image 31s showing the current volume level is displayed.
Further, as described above, the music is not output when the specific image 31e is displayed, but the volume adjustment sound (“Pip ♪”” is set from the audio output device 32 at the volume value corresponding to the current volume level. ) Is output.
The display mode (size, display position, color, etc.) of the level image 31s during the variable display and the display mode of the level image 31s while waiting for customers may be the same display mode or different displays. It may be an embodiment. For example, the level image 31s in the variable display may be displayed in a smaller size than the level image 31s in the waiting state, may be displayed in a different display position, or may be displayed in a lighter color. It may or may not be displayed in the first place.
Further, during the variable display, the volume adjustment sound (“pip ♪”) may not be output, and the notification may be performed only by displaying the level image 31s.

That is, according to FIG. 68, when the “volume adjustment” is performed by the cross-shaped button 36 at the timing when the specific image 31e is displayed, the level image 31s is displayed in the right corner of the image display device 31 together with the specific image 31e. Will be.
In this way, even if the level image 31s is displayed together with the specific image 31e, the display area of the specific image 31e is larger than the display area of the level image 31s, so that it is possible to prevent the specific image 31e from becoming inconspicuous. ..
In the example of FIG. 68, it is shown that the current volume value is “2”, and if the operation by the cross-shaped button 36 is not performed for a predetermined time after displaying the level image 31s, FIG. 68 ( As shown in d), the level image 31s is erased.

In this way, when the "volume adjustment" is performed at the timing when the specific image 31e is displayed, the level image 31s is displayed together with the specific image 31e.
As a result, the degree of freedom in the timing of performing the "volume adjustment" can be increased, and at the same time, it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has been completed.
In addition, "volume adjustment" in FIG. 68 may be read as "light amount adjustment".

In the time chart 8 of FIG. 69, (a) shows an example in which the decorative member notice (decorative member notice effect of FIG. 38) is performed in the variation effect pattern 7, and (b) shows the “specific image” in the variation effect pattern 7. Is displayed, an example in which the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off is shown, and (c) shows an example in which an effect using the start port lamp 14b is performed.

(A) is the variation effect pattern 7, and the timing (a) T0 is the timing at which the variation display is started. It should be noted that the "decorative member notice" is not executed and the "specific image" is not displayed until the timing (a) T2.
Then, when the timing (a) T2 is reached, the "decorative member notice" is executed once at a predetermined timing until the timing (a) T4 at which the result of the jackpot determination is notified. That is, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b are operated from the initial position to the operating position, and are returned to the initial position after a lapse of a predetermined time.

Then, the "loss notification" is performed at the timing (a) T4 to the timing (a) T5, and the "decorative member notice" is not executed (0 times) after the timing (a) T4.
Then, the "specific image" is displayed at the timing (a) T5 to the timing (a) T6, and thereafter, the transition is made to the "temporary stop display period" and the "fixed stop display period".
That is, the timing before the "specific image" is displayed (a) T5-timing (a) T6 is compared with the timing (a) T5-timing (a) T6 after the "specific image" is displayed. , The first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b are easy to operate at the operating position.
As a result, before the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, the expectation for the jackpot can be improved by the decorative member advance notice effect.
Further, after the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to prevent the excessive expectation for the jackpot from being improved.

Before the timing (a) T5 to timing (a) T6 where the "specific image" is displayed, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b may be operated not only once but also a plurality of times. Good.
Further, in the variable effect pattern of loss, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b do not operate after the timing (a) T4, but in the variable effect pattern 30 of the jackpot variation effect pattern, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b do not operate. For example, at the timing (f) T7 of FIG. 50, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b may be operated as a part of the effect of the resurrection effect.
That is, in the case of loss
Before the display of the "specific image" → it works (winning the notice of the decorative member), after the display of the "specific image" → it does not work, and so on.
There are cases where "specific image" is not displayed → does not work (not won in the notice of decorative members), and "specific image" is displayed → does not work.
In the case of a big hit
Before the display of the "specific image" → it works (winning the notice of the decorative member), after the display of the "specific image" → it does not work, and so on.
Before the display of the "specific image" → does not work (not won in the notice of decorative members), after the display of the "specific image" → does not work, and so on.
Before the display of the "specific image" → it does not work (not won in the notice of the decorative member), after the display of the "specific image" → it works (revival effect)
Before the display of the "specific image" → it works (winning the notice of the decorative member), after the display of the "specific image" → it works (revival effect)
There will be.

(B) is the variation effect pattern 7, and mainly shows the characteristic part of the scene of "background switching".
Timing (b) T0 is the timing at which the "specific image" is displayed.
At this time, the power of the gaming machine 1 is ON (power is supplied via the power plug 141).
Then, at the timing (b) T1 during the display of the "specific image" (for example, before the elapse of 2S), a power failure occurs and the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off (power is not supplied via the power plug 141). It becomes. In this case, of course, the image display device 31 is also turned off, so that the "specific image" is not displayed either.

Then, at the timing (b) T2, the power failure is resolved, the power is restored, and the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. The timing (b) T2 is during the "background switching" and is the display period of the "specific image" (for example, before the lapse of 2S). Therefore, it is conceivable to display the "specific image" that was displayed before the power failure again, but prioritize the image at the time of power restoration (please wait for a while while the power is restored) rather than redisplaying the "specific image". It is displayed on the image display device 31.
That is, at the timing (b) T2, the "specific image" is not displayed, and the image at the time of power restoration (please wait for a while while the power is restored) is displayed.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs while the "specific image" is being displayed (for example, before 2S has elapsed), the image at the time of power restoration (during power restoration, please wait for a while) rather than redisplaying the "specific image". ) Is prioritized and displayed on the image display device 31.
As a result, it is possible to accurately notify the player of the content to be notified to the player with the highest priority according to the current situation of the gaming machine 1.

(C) indicates that the effect using the hold icon and the start port lamp 14b is performed in the continuous variation effect, and the variation effect pattern 1 is executed as the first variation (first game). As the second variation (second game), it is shown that the variation effect pattern 7 is executed.
In addition, in each variation production, only the main part will be explained.

The timing (c) T0 is the timing of the “fixed stop display period” of the fluctuation effect pattern 1 in the first fluctuation.
At this timing, the fixed stop image is displayed on the image display device 31. Further, a game ball enters the first starting port 14, and "hold" is updated from "0" to "1" (stored in the first storage unit).
In addition, based on the entry into the first start port 14, the player wins the execution of the look-ahead effect using the hold icon and the start port lamp 14b, and the hold icon is green from the time of entry into the first start port 14. It is said that the look-ahead effect of displaying the hold icon and lighting (lighting) the start port lamp 14b in green has been executed.
That is, from that timing, the "starting port lamp" changes from extinguished to lit (green), and the "image display device" displays the green hold icon image.
The "specific image" is not displayed.
Then, these aspects continue until the timing (c) T1.

The timing (c) T1 is the timing at which the first variation effect pattern 1 ends and the second variation effect pattern 7 starts.
At this timing, the "normal fluctuation period" in the second fluctuation effect pattern 7 starts, and the normal fluctuation image and the green hold icon image (shifted to the fluctuation icon display area 31a) are displayed on the "image display device". ) Is displayed.
With the start of the second variation, "hold" becomes "0" (no memory is stored in the first storage unit to the second storage unit), and the start port lamp 14b continues to light (green). That is, the green hold icon image of the "image display device" and the lighting (green) of the start port lamp 14b are continuously performed over at least two fluctuations.
The "specific image" is not displayed.
Then, these aspects continue until the timing (c) T2, and from the timing (c) T2, the green hold icon image is hidden and cannot be seen by the player, but the start port lamp 14b The lighting (green) continues and is still visible to the player. That is, even if the green hold icon image is hidden due to the transition to the "SP reach fluctuation period", the start port lamp 14b emits light in the color corresponding to the hidden green hold icon image. By visually recognizing the start port lamp 14b, the player can grasp the degree of expectation for the jackpot.

The timing (c) T3 is the timing at which the “SP reach fluctuation period” is entered, and at that timing, the SP reach image is displayed on the “image display device”.
Further, the start port lamp 14b continues to be lit (green).
The "specific image" is not displayed.
Then, after that, "missing notification" is performed at the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot determination, and the timing (c) T4 is reached.

Timing (c) T4 is a timing for shifting from the “SP reach fluctuation period” to the “background switching”, and at this timing, the “specific image” is displayed “between 2S” on the “image display device”.
Further, the start port lamp 14b continues to be lit (green).
Then, these aspects continue until the timing (c) T5.
Then, when the timing (c) T5 is reached, the "specific image" is hidden, but the start port lamp 14b is lit (green) until the "fixed stop display period" (not shown) is completed. continue.
That is, in the look-ahead effect using the hold icon and the start port lamp 14b, the hold icon may be hidden during the change effect and become invisible, but the start port lamp 14b is hidden during the change effect. It is always visible without becoming.
Therefore, even if the "specific image" is displayed by the "background switching", the light emitting effect (for example, lighting (green)) by the start port lamp 14b is not obscured by the display of the "specific image". It does not interfere with each other.
As a result, the display of the "specific image" clearly recognizes that the reach effect has ended, and the start port lamp 14b allows the user to grasp the degree of expectation for the jackpot in the completed reach effect. Can be done.

FIG. 70 shows a case where the “design confirmation command” transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received by the effect control board 120 and a case where the “design confirmation command” is not normally received.
The timing of receiving the "design confirmation command" on the effect control board 120 is approximately the timing of (c).
Therefore, the same display mode is used in all cases until the "loss notification" is performed in (a) and the "specific image 31e" is displayed in (b).
Further, the temporary stop display in (c) has the same display mode until the middle, but when the "symbol confirmation command" is not normally received, the effect symbol does not display the fixed stop and remains displayed as the temporary stop. It becomes.

That is, in any case, since the "specific image 31e" is displayed, it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended.
Further, the effect symbol of FIG. 70 (d) is not displayed as a fixed stop, and as shown by, when the "design confirmation command" is not received, the temporary stop display of the effect symbol continues, and the result of the jackpot determination is Was not confirmed, and there was a problem that the player felt annoyed.
However, in any case, since the "specific image 31e" is displayed, it is possible to infer that the reach effect has ended due to a loss by displaying the "specific image 31e", so that the "design confirmation command" is received. If this is not the case, even if the result of the jackpot determination is not finalized, it is possible to prevent the player from being bothered.

FIG. 71 is a table in which error-related commands related to errors that may occur in the gaming machine 1 and priorities in the error-related commands are extracted.
In addition, in FIG. 71, "priority" means which error notification or the like is prioritized when a plurality of errors occur at the same time, or it is impossible to notify at the same time as other displays or the like. It defines the error.
For example, when the "large winning opening abnormal winning error" and the "dish full tank error" occur at the same time, the error notification related to the "large winning opening abnormal winning error" is prioritized.
Further, in the case of "designation at the time of power restoration", as shown in FIG. 72 described later, only notification related to power restoration is performed (notification cannot be performed at the same time as other displays, etc.), and "dish full tank error start designation" is performed. In the case of "dish full tank error end designation", for example, as shown in FIG. 72 described later, for example, the discharge promotion image 31u for prompting the discharge of the game ball from the saucer 40 is displayed at the same time as the specific image 31e (other display, etc. It is possible to notify at the same time).

The error-related commands are "Specify when power is turned on" (power ON with operation of RAM clear SW) with priority "1" (highest priority), and "Specify when power is restored" with priority "2". (Power ON without operation of RAM clear SW), "Big winning opening abnormal winning error" with priority "3" (For example, the big winning opening detection SW was turned ON even though it was not a big hit), priority "Board surface error start designation" with a ranking of "4" (for example, a magnetic sensor or radio wave sensor (not shown) detects abnormal magnetism or abnormal radio waves), and "door open error start designation" with a priority of "5". "Error end designation" (for example, the door open switch 133 detects the door open), "Plate full tank error start designation" with priority "6" Plate full tank error end designation "(For example, a predetermined amount or more of game balls are placed in the saucer 40. (Detects that it is stored) "Switch non-connection error start designation" Switch non-connection error end designation "(for example, it is detected that one of the switches is not connected) has a priority of "7".

FIG. 72 shows a case in which a power failure occurs during the display of the “specific image” and the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off (hereinafter, case 1), and a predetermined amount in the saucer 40 while the “specific image” is displayed. This is an animation showing a case (hereinafter referred to as case 2) in which the above-mentioned game balls are stored and a plate full tank error occurs.
Note that FIG. 72 corresponds to the time chart for explaining (b) the variation effect pattern 7 described in FIG. 69.

The timings (b) to T0 are the timings (b) to T0 in FIG. 69, and in each case, the "loss notification" is performed.
Then, in case 1, a "specific image" is displayed from timing (b) T0 to timing (b) T1, and at timing (b) T1, a power failure occurs and the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. The image display device 31 is turned off (the screen goes black).
Then, at the timing (b) T2, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on after the power is restored, the specific image 31e is not redisplayed on the image display device 31, and the image at the time of power restoration (please wait for a while while the power is restored). Is displayed.

On the other hand, in case 2, the "specific image" is displayed from timing (b) T0 to timing (b) T3.
Although not shown in FIG. 69, if a dish full tank error (an error having a low priority) occurs between timing (b) T0 to timing (b) T3, the front side of the specific image 31e is one. The discharge promotion image 31u is superimposed and displayed on the part.
That is, the display of the specific image 31e and the display of the emission promotion image 31u are performed at the same time.
Then, the timing (b) T3 to the temporary stop display is performed.

That is, if a power failure occurs during the display of the specific image 31e and a high-priority "designate when power is restored" command is received during the display period of the specific image 31e, the power is restored without redisplaying the specific image 31e. Priority is given to the time image (please wait for a while while the power is being restored).
On the other hand, if a low-priority "dish full tank error start designation" command is received while the specific image 31e is being displayed, the specific image 31e is continuously displayed and at the same time, the emission promotion image 31u is displayed.
As a result, according to the determined priority, the one with a high priority is notified on the entire display area of the image display device 31, and the one with a low priority is a part of the display area of the image display device 31. Since the notification is performed, it is possible to perform an accurate display according to the priority.
That is, for a device having a high priority such as "designation at the time of power restoration", it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort by clearly notifying the process until the gaming machine 1 is restored.

For example, when a "switch not connected error" having a priority of "7" occurs during the display period of the specific image 31e, the display mode is the same as that of the dish full tank error of FIG. 72.
That is, along with the display of the specific image 31e, an image notifying the switch non-connection error is displayed.
Here, for a switch unconnected error, it is necessary to turn off the power of the gaming machine 1 and check the unconnected switch or the like.
Therefore, the power may be turned off by the administrator of the gaming machine 1 in order to perform the above confirmation when the image notifying the switch non-connection error is displayed together with the display of the specific image 31e.
In such a case, if the switch is not connected and the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on again, the image at the time of power restoration (please wait for a while while the power is restored) is prioritized without redisplaying the specific image 31e. To display.
That is, even if the situation before the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off is that the specific image 31e is displayed and the image notifying the switch disconnection error is displayed, or only the specific image 31e is displayed. , At the time of power restoration, the specific image 31e is not displayed again, but the image at the time of power restoration (please wait for a while while the power is restored) is displayed with priority.
As a result, regardless of the display status before the power failure, it is possible to notify the entire display area of the image display device 31 that the power supply of the gaming machine 1 has been restored.

FIG. 73 shows a case where there is no “change hold icon” and a case where there is a “change hold icon”.
Although the description before the "loss notification" in (a) is omitted, for example, in the case where there is a "change hold icon", when the change effect is started, the hold icon display area 31b is filled with "change hold icon". The explanation is based on the assumption that the "change hold icon" is displayed.

In the case where there is no "change hold icon", even after the specific image 31e is displayed in (b), as shown in (c) and (d), the hold icon display area 31b has a normal color hold icon (in the figure). The hold icon indicated by "○") is displayed.
In the case where there is a "change hold icon", even after the specific image 31e is displayed in (b), as shown in (c) and (d), the hold icon display area 31b holds a color different from the normal color. An icon (holding icon indicated by "●" in the figure) is displayed.
That is, before displaying the specific image 31e, for example, at the start of fluctuation in the variation effect, a hold icon (hold icon indicated by “●” in the figure) having a color different from the normal color was displayed in the hold icon display area 31b. In this case, after the specific image 31e is displayed, it is displayed again in the hold icon display area 31b in the same display mode (hold icon indicated by “●” in the figure).
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.
If a hold icon (hold icon indicated by "●" in the figure) having a color different from the normal color is displayed in the hold icon display area 31b before the specific image 31e is displayed, after the specific image 31e is displayed, the hold icon is displayed. A normal color hold icon (hold icon indicated by “◯” in the figure) may be displayed in the hold icon display area 31b (default display after the display of the specific image 31e).
If a hold icon (hold icon indicated by “●” in the figure) having a color different from the normal color is displayed in the hold icon display area 31b before the specific image 31e is displayed, after the specific image 31e is displayed, Further, it may be changed to a hold icon of a color with a high expectation for a big hit (for example, the hold icon displayed by "●" is displayed by "◎").

When changing the hold icon of the normal color to the "change hold icon", it may be changed through various effects. For example, the hold icon itself may be displayed in a large size and changed through an effect of inciting whether or not it changes to the "change hold icon", or a character image (so-called mini character image) having substantially the same size as the hold icon may be displayed. It may be displayed and changed through an effect of inciting whether or not the mini character image changes to a "change hold icon".
However, in the scenes (b), (c), and (d) of FIG. 73, the effect of inciting whether or not the icon changes to the "change hold icon" is not executed.
As a result, in particular, it is possible to prevent the display of the specific image 31e from being hindered, and it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended.

FIG. 74 shows a modified example.
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in any of the gaming states, when SP reach or SPSP reach is not executed, variable display is performed on the effect symbol line (single line) of 1, and SP reach is performed. Or, in the SPSP reach, the reach effect may be performed by a plurality of effect symbol lines.
In such a gaming machine, for example, as shown in (a), a so-called double reach effect in which a reach effect by "2 symbols" and a reach effect by "3 symbols" are simultaneously performed in the "SP reach fluctuation period". When (plurality of effect symbol lines) is executed, as shown in (b), after displaying the specific image 31e and shielding the effect symbol 38, as shown in (c) and (d), "normal variation". It is also possible to return to the production symbol line of 1 when the "period" or the like is performed.
As a result, it is possible to return to the effect symbol line of 1 after a pause in the display of the specific image 31e, so that the switching can be performed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, the specific image 31e is not limited to the image imitating the shutter shown in FIG. 43 or the like, but may be an image imitating the curtain shown in FIG. 74 or an image showing a motif (model name or the like) of the game machine 1 (not shown). It may be an image by a character (not shown), an image imitating smoke, fog, or haze (haze) (not shown), or a white-out image or black-out image (not shown).
Further, even if the specific image 31e is the same, the display time of the specific image 31e may be different depending on the type of the variation effect pattern, for example. For example, the variable effect pattern accompanied by the execution of the SPSP reach may have a longer display time of the specific image 31e than the variable effect pattern accompanied by the execution of the SP reach.
Moreover, you may have two or more kinds of specific images 31e. In that case, it may be used properly depending on the game state, mode, and the like.
Further, the specific image 31e may have a plurality of types in each of the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state.
Further, it is possible to have a plurality of specific images 31e and display the specific images 31e according to the mode in the same gaming state.
Further, a plurality of specific images 31e may be provided, and the plurality of specific images 31e may include, for example, a special specific image 31e that is selected with a high probability when the variation effect pattern 30 is executed. As a result, when a special specific image 31e is displayed, it is possible to have an expectation that a revival effect will occur.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74, when shielding is performed by the specific image 31e, for example, the specific image 31e imitating a curtain may be used to shield from the right side of the screen of the image display device 31. Further, it may be from the left side of the screen of the image display device 31, may be from the upper side of the screen of the image display device 31, or may be from the lower side of the screen of the image display device 31.
In this way, by gradually shielding the effect symbol 38 and the like, it is possible to give an appearance of fun.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74, when the shielding by the specific image 31e is released, it is released from the left side of the screen of the image display device 31 and exposed from the display element displayed on the left side of the screen, as in the case of shielding. This may be done, or the image display device 31 may be released from the right side of the screen to be exposed from the display elements displayed on the right side of the screen, or from the upper side of the screen of the image display device 31. It may be released so that it is exposed from the display element displayed on the upper side of the screen, or it may be released from the lower side of the screen of the image display device 31 and exposed from the display element displayed on the lower side of the screen. You may go.

In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery is one probability each in the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a so-called setting-mounted gaming machine having different jackpot probabilities for each set value of a plurality of stages.
For example. With a jackpot probability of 1/240 and a jackpot probability of 1/40 in a high-probability gaming state (probabilities of set values 2 to 5 are omitted), any set value can be set at the game store.
If the set value is installed in this way, the player can play the game while guessing whether the advantageous jackpot probability is set or the unfavorable jackpot probability is set. It can contribute to the improvement of interest.

Then, when such a set value is mounted, the specific image 31e may be used to suggest which of the set values of the plurality of stages is set (in the specific image 31e). , So-called setting suggestion effect).
Specifically, when the set value is set, a command indicating which set value is set is transmitted, so the set value information based on the command is stored in the sub RAM 120c.
Further, a plurality of types of specific images 31e are stored in the CGROM 156 so as to have different designs, colors, and the like.
Then, for example, when the sub CPU 120a determines the variation effect pattern for displaying the specific image 31e, it determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect, and if not, determines to display the normal specific image 31e. Then, when executing, it is determined to display a special specific image 31e corresponding to the set value information stored in the sub RAM 120c.

For example, when the setting value 1 is set and the setting suggestion effect is executed, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that any one of the setting value 1, the setting value 3, and the setting value 5 (odd number setting value) is set. It is decided to display a special specific image 31e.
On the other hand, when the setting value 6 is set and the setting suggestion effect is executed, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that any of the setting value 2, the setting value 4, and the setting value 6 (even number setting value) is set. A special specific image 31e, a special specific image 31e suggesting that any one of the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6 (so-called high setting value) is likely to be set, and the setting value 6 Is determined to display a special specific image 31e that deterministically indicates that is set.
When the setting value 6 is set and the setting suggestion effect is executed, it is easy to determine to display a special specific image 31e suggesting that the even number setting value is likely to be set, and the setting value 6 is set. It may be difficult to determine to display a special specific image 31e that deterministically indicates that is set.

In this way, by giving the specific image 31e a role of so-called setting suggestion effect, it is possible to give useful information to, for example, a player who is disappointed because the SP reach is lost. Therefore, it is possible to arouse the motivation to play.
In addition, it is possible to make the game more desired that the SP reach or higher is executed.

Further, the distribution ratio of the variation effect pattern of FIG. 33 may be changed for each set value of a plurality of stages. For example, the distribution ratio in FIG. 33 may be set as the value of the set value 1, and in the case of the set value 6, another variation effect pattern determination table may be stored in the sub ROM 120b. For example, in FIG. 33, the distribution ratio of the variable effect pattern 16 is 70%, the distribution ratio of the variable effect pattern 17 is 20%, and the distribution ratio of the variable effect pattern 18 is 10%. In the variable effect pattern determination table of the value 6, the distribution ratio of the variable effect pattern 16 is 30%, the distribution ratio of the variable effect pattern 17 is 30%, and the distribution ratio of the variable effect pattern 18 is 40%. You may. In addition, there may be a variation effect pattern that is likely to appear for each of the set values in a plurality of stages.
With this configuration, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of guessing the set value from the executed variation effect pattern, so that the game entertainment can be improved.
If the distribution ratio of the variation effect pattern of FIG. 33 is configured to change for each of the setting values of the plurality of stages, the appearance ratio of the specific image 31e will naturally change for each of the setting values of the plurality of stages. .. In this way, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of estimating the set value even from the specific image 31e in which the appearance ratio changes for each of the set values in a plurality of stages, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, although it has been described that the specific image 31e may have a role of a so-called setting suggestion effect, it may have a role of a notice effect for announcing the possibility of a big hit.
Specifically, the specific image 31e may indicate the degree of expectation that the "revival effect" in the variation effect pattern 30 of FIG. 33 will be executed.
In this case, a plurality of types of specific images 31e are stored in the CGROM 156. For example, in the variation effect pattern 18 (loss), it is easier to select the normal specific image 31e than the special specific image 31e, and the variation effect pattern At 30 (big hit), it is easier to select the special specific image 31e than the normal specific image 31e, and it is expected that the "revival effect" will be executed when the special specific image 31e is displayed. Let me do it.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the display of the specific image 31e from merely playing the role of switching the background. Therefore, it is possible to make it desired that the special specific image 31e be displayed, and to further improve the interest of the game.
The specific image 31e may have a role of setting suggestion effect and a role of advance notice effect at the same time.
As a result, the player's attention can be drawn at once to the display of the specific image 31e, so that the game interest can be further improved.

In the present embodiment, the description has been made as a gaming machine having a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, and a high-probability gaming state, but the provided gaming state can be changed as appropriate.
For example, a gaming machine having a normal gaming state and a high-probability gaming state and not having a time-saving gaming state may be used, or a gaming machine having a normal gaming state and a time-saving gaming state (for example, one type and two types of gaming machines). A gaming machine that does not have a high-probability gaming state may be used.
Even in such a gaming machine, a common specific image 31e may be used in different gaming states, or a different specific image 31e may be used for each gaming state.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 1)
In some conventional gaming machines, in order to make the player clearly recognize that the reach effect has been developed, the reach effect is performed after the development effect (for example, FIG. 14 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-121404). "Fusuma production"). However, after the reach production is finished (for example, after notifying the loss and ending), no production is performed, so that some players cannot clearly recognize that the reach production is finished, and the game is enjoyed. It also contributed to the decline in the number of people.

A first configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped. Identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying them, and a predetermined command (for example, each executed by the main CPU 110a). A command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process) is provided, and the effect control means is provided from the command transmission means. The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed to change the symbol. It is possible to execute a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) to stop the first symbol (for example, the effect symbol 38) and a second symbol whose size is different from that of the first symbol. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach) in the variable effect including a symbol (for example, a small effect symbol 38d), and when the specific effect is executed (for example, FIG. 43). A specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) can be displayed on (c) T4 to T5), and the second symbol is visually recognized while the specific image is being displayed (for example, (c) T5 to T6 in FIG. 43). After the specific image is displayed (for example, (c) T6 to T7 in FIG. 43), both the first symbol and the second symbol are visually displayed.
As a result, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

A second configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. Identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying them, and a predetermined command (for example, each executed by the main CPU 110a). A command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process) is provided, and the effect control means is provided from the command transmission means. The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed to change the symbol. It is possible to execute a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) to stop the first symbol (for example, the effect symbol 38) and a second symbol whose size is different from that of the first symbol. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach) in the variable effect including a symbol (for example, a small effect symbol 38d), and when the specific effect is executed (for example, FIG. 43). A specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) can be displayed on (c) T4 to T5), and before (for example, (c) T4 to T5 in FIG. 43) and after (for example, FIG. In 43 (c) T7 to T8), the display mode of the second symbol does not change (for example, only the symbol composed of numbers), but the display mode of the first symbol can be changed (for example, only the symbol composed of numbers). Can be changed to a symbol consisting of numbers and a symbol consisting of characters).
As a result, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

A third configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped. Identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying them, and a predetermined command (for example, each executed by the main CPU 110a). A command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process) is provided, and the effect control means is provided from the command transmission means. The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed to change the symbol. Is temporarily stopped (for example, the effect symbol 38 is stopped in a state of being slightly shaken), and then the main stop (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d are completely stopped without moving). Patterns 1 to variable effect pattern 33) can be executed, and a specific effect (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach) can be executed in the variable effect, and when the specific effect is executed (for example, FIG. 44). (C) T4 to T5) can display a specific image (for example, the specific image 31e), and when the specific image is displayed (for example, (c) in FIG. 44), the symbol is temporarily stopped (for example). , (C) T6 to T7 in FIG. 44), the predetermined effect (for example, the motion effect by the character symbol) is not executed, but the specific image is not displayed (for example, the symbol in FIG. 44 (a)). In the temporary stop (for example, (a) T1 to T2 in FIG. 44), a predetermined effect (for example, an operation effect using a character symbol) can be executed.
As a result, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

A fourth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process) and a predetermined number of determination rights (for example, the 0th storage unit shown in FIG. 12A) When the determination is made with the hold storage means (for example, the main RAM 110c) that can be held and stored (which can be stored up to the fourth storage unit), the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. Identification information display control means (for example, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) for displaying the result of determination, and a predetermined command (for example, set and transmission in each process executed by the main CPU 110a). The effect control means includes a command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands), and the effect control means is the predetermined command from the command transmission means. (For example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38, the small effect symbol 38d) is changed, and the symbol is stopped. (For example, the variable effect pattern 1 to the variable effect pattern 33) can be executed, and the reserved image corresponding to the right stored by the reserved storage means (for example, displayed in the first special symbol reserved number display area 31c). 1st special symbol hold number (U1), 2nd special symbol hold number display area 31d (2nd special symbol hold number (U2)) is displayed (for example, 1st special symbol hold number display) It is possible to execute the display of 0 to 4 displayed in the area 31c and the display of 0 to 4 displayed in the second special symbol hold number display area 31d, and in the variable effect, a specific effect (for example, SP reach, SPSP) can be executed. Reach) can be executed, and a specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) can be displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, (c) T4 to T5 in FIG. 43). Before the display of (for example, (c) T4 in FIG. 43) ~ T5) and later (for example, (c) T7 to T8 in FIG. 43), the display mode of the reserved image does not change (for example, the size, design, etc. do not change), but the display mode of the symbol can be changed. (For example, it is possible to change from only a symbol consisting of numbers to a symbol consisting of numbers and a symbol consisting of characters, that is, the size, design, etc. can be changed).
As a result, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

A fifth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped. The identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, the first gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state), and the above. It is executed by a game state control means (for example, main CPU 110a) capable of controlling a second game state (for example, a high-probability game state, a time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a predetermined command (for example, main CPU 110a). The effect control means includes a command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt process) for transmitting various commands that are set and transmitted in each process to be performed. It is possible to receive the predetermined command from the transmitting means (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed. , It is possible to execute a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) for stopping the symbol, and it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach) in the variable effect. , A specific image (for example, a specific image 31e) can be displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, FIG. 45 (c) T4 to T5 (normal), FIG. 45 (c) T4 to T5 (high probability)). Yes, the specific image that can be displayed in the first game state can be displayed in the second game state (for example, FIG. 45 (c) T5 to T6 (normal), FIG. 45 (c) T5 to T6 (high probability). ) Can display a common specific image 31e).
As a result, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

A sixth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped. Identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying them, and a predetermined command (for example, each executed by the main CPU 110a). A command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt process) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process) is provided, and the effect control means is provided from the command transmission means. The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed to change the symbol. (For example, variation effect pattern 1 to variation effect pattern 33) can be executed, and at least the first mode (for example, mode A in FIG. 46) and the second mode different from the first mode can be executed. It is possible to display any mode with the mode (for example, mode B in FIG. 46), and it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach) in the variable effect, and the specific effect can be performed. When executed (for example, FIG. 46 (c) T4 to T5 (mode A), FIG. 46 (c) T4 to T5 (mode B)), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed. The specific image that can be displayed in the first mode can also be displayed in the second mode (for example, common to FIGS. 46 (c) T5 to T6 (mode A) and FIG. 46 (c) T5 to T6 (mode B). The specific image 31e of the above can be displayed).
As a result, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

A seventh configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped. Identification information display control means (for example, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and predetermined commands (for example, each executed by the main CPU 110a). A command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process) is provided, and the effect control means is provided from the command transmission means. The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed to change the symbol. It is possible to execute a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) for stopping the above, and in the variable effect, a specific effect accompanied by a music (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18) is executed. Is possible, and a specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) can be displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, the variation effect pattern 7 to the variation effect pattern 18). It is possible to execute the specific effect (for example, variation effect pattern 5 to variation effect pattern 18), and the result is that the special game is not performed (for example, step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process is denied). When the specific image is displayed (for example, the variation effect pattern 7 to the variation effect pattern 18), the result is that the special game is not performed (for example, step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process is denied). Compared with the case where the specific image is not displayed (for example, the variable effect pattern 1 to the variable effect pattern 6), it is easier to execute the specific effect composed of the plurality of songs (for example, the variable effect). Pattern 1 is a variable effect in which a specific image is not displayed, and the number of songs is 1, whereas pattern 1 is a variable effect in which a specific image is displayed, and the number of songs is 3 (reach effect). The number of songs is 2)).
As a result, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

The eighth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped. Identification information display control means (for example, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and predetermined commands (for example, each executed by the main CPU 110a). A command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process) is provided, and the effect control means is provided from the command transmission means. The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed to change the symbol. (For example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) can be executed, and in the variable effect, a specific effect accompanied by a music (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30) can be executed. ) Is executed, and a specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) can be displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, the variable effect pattern 7 to the variable effect pattern 18, the variable effect pattern 30). Among the specific effects, the number of songs is different between the first specific effect (for example, the variable effect pattern 7) and the second specific effect (for example, the variable effect pattern 16) different from the first specific effect. Different (for example, the variable production pattern 7 has 3 songs (the number of reach production songs is 2), the variable production pattern 16 has 4 songs (the number of reach production songs is 3)), and the first specific effect is executed. Then, the specific image may be displayed, or the second specific effect may be executed and then the specific image may be displayed.
As a result, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

A ninth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped. Identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying them, and a predetermined command (for example, each executed by the main CPU 110a). A command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process) is provided, and the effect control means is provided from the command transmission means. The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed to change the symbol. (For example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) can be executed, and in the variable effect, a specific effect accompanied by a music (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30) can be executed. ) Is executed, and a specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) can be displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, the variable effect pattern 7 to the variable effect pattern 18, the variable effect pattern 30). , At least a part of the specific effect (for example, "background switching" between the "normal reach variation period" and the "SP reach variation period" in the variation effect pattern 7) and the specific image are displayed. The period (for example, "background switching" between the "SP reach variation period" and the "temporary stop display period" in the variation effect pattern 7) is a period without the music (for example, a period during which no music is output). ).
As a result, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

A tenth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. Identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying them, and a predetermined command (for example, each executed by the main CPU 110a). A command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process) is provided, and the effect control means is provided from the command transmission means. The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed to change the symbols. It is possible to execute a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) to stop the variable effect, and in the variable effect, a specific effect accompanied by a music (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30). ) Is executed, and a specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) can be displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, the variable effect pattern 7 to the variable effect pattern 18, the variable effect pattern 30). Before the specific image is displayed, the music is accompanied (for example, in the case of the variable effect pattern 7, the music A, the music B, and the music C are output), and after the specific image is displayed, the music is described. No music (for example, no music is output).
As a result, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

A eleventh configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped. Identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying them, and a predetermined command (for example, each executed by the main CPU 110a). A command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process) is provided, and the effect control means is provided from the command transmission means. The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed to change the symbol. Is temporarily stopped (for example, the effect symbol 38 is stopped in a state of being slightly shaken), and then the main stop (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d are completely stopped without moving). Pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) can be executed, and in the variable effect, a specific effect (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30) can be executed, and the specific effect can be executed. Is executed (for example, the variation effect pattern 7 to the variation effect pattern 18, the variation effect pattern 30), a specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) can be displayed, and the variation effect accompanied by the display of the specific image (for example, the variation effect pattern 30). In the temporary stop of the symbol (for example, the temporary stop display period) in the variation effect pattern 7), the effect sound (for example, the stop sound of the effect symbol 38) is not output, and the variation effect (for example, the display of the specific image) is not accompanied. In the temporary stop of the symbol (for example, the temporary stop display period) in the variable effect pattern 1), an effect sound (for example, the stop sound of the effect symbol 38) is output.
As a result, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

A twelfth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). Execution of the special game according to a determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform the game) (for example, a jackpot determination process) and a determination result that the special game is performed by the determination means. When the determination is made with the special game execution control means (for example, the main CPU 110a) capable of controlling the above, the result of the determination is displayed by displaying the identification information (for example, the special symbol) in a variable manner and then stopping the display. Identification information display control means (for example, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) and predetermined commands (for example, various commands set and transmitted in each process executed by the main CPU 110a). The command transmitting means for transmitting (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) is provided, and the effect control means can receive the predetermined command from the command transmitting means (for example,). In step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process, a variable effect (for example, a variable effect pattern) that changes the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) and stops the symbol. 1 to the variable effect pattern 33) can be executed, and in the variable effect, a specific effect (for example, the variable effect pattern 5 to the variable effect pattern 18) can be executed, and when the specific effect is executed (for example,). , The variable effect pattern 7 to the variable effect pattern 18) can display a specific image (for example, the specific image 31e), and the result of the determination is that the special game is not performed (for example, step S311 of the jackpot determination process). -1), and the variable effect of executing the specific effect using the first symbol (for example, the effect symbol 38 of 6 symbols) accompanied by the display of the specific image, and the display of the specific image are included. The execution ratio is different from the variable effect that executes the specific effect using the second symbol (for example, the effect symbol 38 of 7 symbols) (for example, when the jackpot determination process is lost, the 6 symbols are normal. The specific image 31e may not be displayed as much as it is selected even at the time of approach, but the specific image 31e is displayed as much as it is selected only when the 7 symbols have SP reach or more. Therefore, the ratio of displaying the specific image 31e differs between the case where the reach is reached with 6 symbols and the case where the reach is reached with 7 symbols).
As a result, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). Execution of the special game according to a determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform the game) (for example, a jackpot determination process) and a determination result that the special game is performed by the determination means. When the determination is made with the special game execution control means (for example, the main CPU 110a) capable of controlling the above, the result of the determination is displayed by displaying the identification information (for example, the special symbol) in a variable manner and then stopping the display. Identification information display control means (for example, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) and predetermined commands (for example, various commands set and transmitted in each process executed by the main CPU 110a). The command transmitting means for transmitting (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) is provided, and the effect control means can receive the predetermined command from the command transmitting means (for example,). In step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process, a variable effect (for example, a variable effect pattern) that changes the symbol corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) and stops the symbol. 1 to the variable effect pattern 33) can be executed, and in the variable effect, a specific effect (for example, the variable effect pattern 5 to the variable effect pattern 18 and the variable effect pattern 30) can be executed, and the specific effect can be executed. When executed (for example, the variation effect pattern 7 to the variation effect pattern 18, the variation effect pattern 30), a specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) can be displayed, and the first symbol (for example, the effect symbol 38 of 6 symbols) can be displayed. ) Is used to execute the first suggestion effect of whether or not to execute the specific effect (for example, a symbol fanning effect that encourages whether or not to reach with 6 symbols), and a second symbol (for example, a symbol fanning effect). When the second suggestion effect of whether or not to execute the specific effect (for example, the pattern fanning effect that incites whether or not to reach by the 7 symbols) is executed using the 7 symbol effect symbol 38), Yes, the table of the specific image A variable effect in which the first suggestive effect is executed and then the specific effect is executed, and a variable effect in which the second suggestive effect is executed and then the specific effect is executed, accompanied by the display of the specific image. (For example, 6 symbols are more likely to succeed in the symbol fanning effect than 7 symbols, and 7 symbols are more likely to fail in the symbol fanning effect than 6 symbols. Therefore, the 6 symbols are more likely to reach than the 7 symbols, and the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed because the reach is more likely to occur. The ratio at which the specific image 31e is displayed is different from that of the pattern fanning effect that fuels the presence or absence).
As a result, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

A fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped. Identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying them, and a predetermined command (for example, each executed by the main CPU 110a). A command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process) is provided, and the effect control means is provided from the command transmission means. The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed to change the symbol. It is possible to execute a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) for stopping, and in the variable effect, a specific effect (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18 and variable effect pattern 30) is executed. It is possible to display a specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) when the specific effect is executed (for example, the variation effect pattern 7 to the variation effect pattern 18, the variation effect pattern 30), and the variation During the execution of the effect, it is possible to execute an operation promotion effect (for example, display of the first operation promotion image or display of the second operation promotion image) that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 35), and the operation promotion is performed. The effect includes a first operation promotion effect (for example, display of a first operation promotion image) and a second operation with a higher expectation that the special game is executed than when the first operation promotion effect is executed. Operation promotion effect (for example, display of a second operation promotion image), a variation effect for executing the first operation promotion effect, which includes the display of the specific image, and display of the specific image. Fluctuation to execute the second operation promotion effect The execution ratio is different from that of the effect (for example, the first operation promotion effect is easy to be executed at the time of loss, and the second operation promotion effect is difficult to be executed at the time of loss. The execution rate of the accompanying fluctuation effect is also different).
As a result, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

A fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped. Identification information display control means (for example, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and predetermined commands (for example, each executed by the main CPU 110a). A command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process) is provided, and the effect control means is provided from the command transmission means. The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed to change the symbol. It is possible to execute a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) for stopping, and in the variable effect, a specific effect (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30) is executed. It is possible to display a specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) when the specific effect is executed (for example, the variation effect pattern 5 to the variation effect pattern 18, the variation effect pattern 30), and the variation During the execution of the effect, it is possible to execute an operation promotion effect (for example, display of the first operation promotion image or display of the second operation promotion image) that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 35), and the operation promotion is performed. The effect includes a first operation promotion effect (for example, display of a first operation promotion image) and a second operation with a higher expectation that the special game is executed than when the first operation promotion effect is executed. The specific operation promotion effect (for example, display of a second operation promotion image) and the above-mentioned specific operation promotion effect including the first operation promotion effect and the variation effect accompanied by the second operation promotion effect. Images can be displayed (eg , The specific image 31e can be displayed in FIG. 62 (c) in both the variation effect in which the first operation promotion image of FIG. 62 is displayed and the variation effect in which the second operation promotion image of FIG. 62 is displayed).
As a result, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

A sixteenth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped. Identification information display control means (for example, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and predetermined commands (for example, each executed by the main CPU 110a). A command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process) is provided, and the effect control means is provided from the command transmission means. The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed to change the symbol. It is possible to execute a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) for stopping, and in the variable effect, a specific effect (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30) is executed. It is possible to display a specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) when the specific effect is executed (for example, the variation effect pattern 5 to the variation effect pattern 18, the variation effect pattern 30), and the variation During the execution of the effect, it is possible to execute an operation promotion effect (for example, display of the first operation promotion image or display of the second operation promotion image) that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 35), and the operation promotion is performed. The effect includes a first operation promotion effect (for example, display of a first operation promotion image) and a second operation with a higher expectation that the special game is executed than when the first operation promotion effect is executed. In the variable effect including the operation promotion effect (for example, display of the second operation promotion image) and the first operation promotion effect, the specific image may or may not be displayed (for example,). Fluctuation production pattern 7 is the first operation The crop promotion image can be displayed, and the specific image 31e can be displayed. On the other hand, the variation effect pattern 1 can display the first operation promotion image, but does not display the specific image 31e), and in the variation effect accompanied by the second operation promotion effect, the specific image is displayed (for example,). The variation effect pattern 12 and the variation effect pattern 18 can display the second operation promotion image, and the specific image 31e can be displayed).
As a result, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

A seventeenth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped. The identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, the first gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) and the above. It is executed by a game state control means (for example, main CPU 110a) capable of controlling a second game state (for example, a high-probability game state, a time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a predetermined command (for example, main CPU 110a). The effect control means includes a command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt process) for transmitting various commands that are set and transmitted in each process to be performed. It is possible to receive the predetermined command from the transmitting means (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed. , The variable effect for stopping the symbol (for example, the variable effect pattern 1 to the variable effect pattern 33) can be executed, and in the variable effect, the specific effect (for example, the variable effect pattern 5 to the variable effect pattern 18 and the variable effect pattern 30) can be executed. ) Is executed, and a specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) can be displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, the variable effect pattern 5 to the variable effect pattern 18 and the variable effect pattern 30). , A determination result for notifying the result of the determination accompanied by the execution of the operation promotion effect (for example, the display of the first operation promotion image or the display of the second operation promotion image) that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 35). The notification effect (for example, the determination effect) can be executed, and the ratio of executing the determination result notification effect accompanied by the display of the specific image in the first game state and the specificity in the second game state. It is different from the ratio of executing the determination result notification effect accompanied by the display of an image (for example, the ratio of being determined to be a big hit in a normal gaming state and the ratio of being determined to be a big hit in a high-probability gaming state). Since it is easier to execute the SP reach or more of the loss, the ratio of executing the decision effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e is also different).
As a result, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

◆ The eighteenth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped. Identification information display control means (for example, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and predetermined commands (for example, each executed by the main CPU 110a). A command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process) is provided, and the effect control means is provided from the command transmission means. The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed to change the symbol. It is possible to execute a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) to stop the variable effect, and it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18) in the variable effect. Yes, a specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) can be displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, the variation effect pattern 5 to 18), and an operation means (for example, the operation means (for example) is possible during the execution of the variation effect. , The operation promotion effect (for example, the display of the first operation promotion image or the display of the second operation promotion image) for prompting the operation of the effect button 35) can be executed, and the operation promotion effect includes the first operation promotion effect. (For example, display of the first operation promotion image) and the second operation promotion effect (for example, the second operation) in which the expectation that the special game is executed is higher than when the first operation promotion effect is executed. (Display of the promotion image), and when it is the result of the determination that the special game is not performed (for example, step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process is denied), the said first with the display of the specific image. The specific effect using the operation promotion effect of 1. The execution ratio of the variation effect for executing the specific effect and the variation effect for executing the specific effect using the second operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of the specific image are different (for example, display of the first operation promotion image). This is more likely to cause a loss than the second operation promotion image is displayed, and the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed because the image is more likely to be lost. Therefore, a variable effect for executing a specific effect using the first operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e and a variable effect for executing the specific effect using the second operation promotion effect with the display of the specific image 31e. The execution rate is different for each).
As a result, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

A nineteenth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped. The identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, the first gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) and the above. Executed by a game state control means (for example, main CPU 110a) capable of controlling a second game state (for example, a high-probability game state, a time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a predetermined command (for example, main CPU 110a). The effect control means includes a command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt process) for transmitting various commands that are set and transmitted in each process to be performed. It is possible to receive the predetermined command from the transmitting means (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed. , The variable effect for stopping the symbol (for example, the variable effect pattern 1 to the variable effect pattern 33) can be executed, and in the variable effect, the specific effect (for example, the variable effect pattern 5 to the variable effect pattern 18 and the variable effect pattern 30) can be executed. ) Is executed, and a specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) can be displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, the variable effect pattern 5 to the variable effect pattern 18 and the variable effect pattern 30). During the execution of the variation effect, it is possible to execute an operation promotion effect (for example, display of a first operation promotion image or display of a second operation promotion image) that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 35). The operation promotion effect includes a first operation promotion effect (for example, display of a first operation promotion image) and an expectation that the special game is executed more than when the first operation promotion effect is executed. High second operation promotion A variable effect that includes an effect (for example, display of a second operation promotion image) and executes the specific effect using the second operation promotion effect that accompanies the display of the specific image in the first game state. And the variable effect of executing the specific effect using the second operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of the specific image in the second game state, the execution ratios are different from each other (for example, in the normal game state). Unlike the ratio determined to be a big hit and the ratio determined to be a big hit in a high-probability gaming state, the specific image 31e in the first gaming state is more likely to be executed in the normal gaming state than the lost SP reach. A variation effect that executes a specific effect using the second operation promotion effect accompanied by a display, and a variation that executes a specific effect using the second operation promotion effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e in the second game state. The execution rate is different from the production).
As a result, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

A twentieth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped. Identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying them, and a predetermined command (for example, each executed by the main CPU 110a). A command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process) is provided, and the effect control means is provided from the command transmission means. The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed to change the symbol. It is possible to execute a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) for stopping, and in the variable effect, a specific effect (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30) is executed. It is possible to display a specific image (for example, the specific image 31e) when the specific effect is executed (for example, the variable effect pattern 5 to the variable effect pattern 18 and the variable effect pattern 30), and the specific effect can be displayed. During the execution of the effect, an operation promotion effect (for example, display of the first operation promotion image or display of the second operation promotion image) that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 35) can be executed, and the operation is described. The means can be changed from the first mode (for example, a non-vibrating mode) to the second mode (for example, a vibrating mode), and the number of times the operating means is changed to the second mode is the first number of times. The rate at which the specific image is displayed differs between the case of (for example, 0 times) and the case of the second number of times (for example, 1 time) different from the first number of times (for example, in the case of loss, the effect is produced. The number of vibrations of the button 35 is 0. In the case of a big hit, when the number of vibrations of the effect button 35 is 1 and the number of vibrations is 0, the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed due to the loss. Therefore, the ratio at which the specific image 31e is displayed differs between the case where the operating means is not vibrated and the case where the operating means is vibrated).
As a result, by displaying the specific image 31e, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect has ended, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 2)
In a conventional gaming machine, a special game determination is made as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is generated when the gaming ball enters the starting port, and a variable effect is produced based on the result of the special game determination. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-221253). However, there is a problem that the interest in games tends to decline.

A first configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped. Identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying them, and a predetermined command (for example, each executed by the main CPU 110a). A command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process) is provided, and the effect control means is provided from the command transmission means. The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed to change the symbol. (For example, variation effect pattern 1 to variation effect pattern 33) can be executed, and the result of the determination is notified at a predetermined timing in the variation effect (for example, the timing of (a) T12 in FIG. 52). Then, in the fluctuation effect, a suggestion effect according to the result of the determination (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation period", "normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "all" Temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "rotation fluctuation period" and "temporary stop display period") and the suggestion notification effect (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 notification period" and "pseudo-ream" that predict that the suggestion effect will be executed. 3 Notification period ”,“ Reach! ”In“ Dialogue notice production ”, Selection of options in“ Roulette notice production ”(for example, selection of“ SP ”in FIG. 56), Step-up in“ SU notice production ” The display of the notice effect image 31p (for example, the display of "correct SU5 full rotation" in FIG. 56) and the display of the "specific image 31e") can be executed, and the suggestion notification effect is executed (for example, in FIG. 52). ( When the execution timing of the suggestion effect (for example, (a) T4 in FIG. 52) comes after T1 to (a) T3), the suggestion effect is executed (for example, (a) T4 to (a) T4 in FIG. 52). a) Pseudo-ream 2 variation is executed in T5), and the number of the suggestion notification effect and the suggestion effect that can be executed differs between before the predetermined timing and after the predetermined timing (for example, before the predetermined timing). Can execute suggestion notification effects such as "pseudo-ream 2 notification period", "pseudo-ream 3 notification period", "line notice production", "roulette notice production", and "SU notice production", and respond to each of these. Suggestive effects are feasible. On the other hand, after the predetermined timing, only the suggestion notification effect of the display of the "specific image 31e" can be executed, and the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period" corresponding to the display of the "specific image 31e" can be executed. Only the suggestion effect of is feasible).
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

A second configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped. Identification information display control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying them, and a predetermined command (for example, each executed by the main CPU 110a). A command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process) is provided, and the effect control means is provided from the command transmission means. The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed to change the symbol. (For example, variation effect pattern 1 to variation effect pattern 33) can be executed, and the result of the determination is notified at a predetermined timing in the variation effect (for example, the timing of (a) T12 in FIG. 52). Then, in the fluctuation effect, a suggestion effect according to the result of the determination (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation period", "normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "all" The temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "rotational fluctuation period" and the "temporary stop display period" and the suggestion notification effect (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 notification period" and "pseudo-ream" that predict that the suggestion effect will be executed 3 Notification period ”,“ Reach! ”In“ Dialogue notice production ”, Selection of options in“ Roulette notice production ”(for example, selection of“ SP ”in FIG. 56), Step-up in“ SU notice production ” The display of the notice effect image 31p (for example, the display of "correct SU5 full rotation" in FIG. 56) and the display of the "specific image 31e") can be executed, and the suggestion notification effect is executed (for example, in FIG. 52). ( When the execution timing of the suggestion effect (for example, (a) T4 in FIG. 52) comes after T1 to (a) T3), the suggestion effect is executed (for example, (a) T4 to (a) T4 in FIG. 52). a) Pseudo-ream 2 variation is executed in T5), and before the predetermined timing, the first suggestion notification effect (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 notification period" or "pseudo-ream 3 notification period") and the first suggestion The combination with the production (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period" or "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation period") and the second suggestion notification production (for example, "reach! The combination of the second suggestion effect (for example, "normal reach fluctuation period") and the second suggestion effect (for example, "normal reach fluctuation period") can be executed, and after the predetermined timing, the third suggestion notification effect (for example, "specific image") can be executed. The combination of the display of "31e") and the third suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period") can be executed.
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

A third configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped. Identification information display control means (for example, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and predetermined commands (for example, each executed by the main CPU 110a). A command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process) is provided, and the effect control means is provided from the command transmission means. The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed to change the symbol. It is possible to execute a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) for stopping the above, and in the variable effect, a notice effect (for example, a dialogue advance notice effect) for notifying the possibility of the special game occurring is performed. It is possible to execute, and the result of the determination is notified at a predetermined timing in the variation effect (for example, the timing of (a) T12 in FIG. 52), and in the variation effect, a suggestion effect corresponding to the result of the determination is performed. (For example, the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period", the "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation period", the "SP reach fluctuation period", the "total rotation fluctuation period", and the "temporary stop display period"). Selection of options in the suggestion notification effect (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 notification period", "pseudo-ream 3 notification period", and "roulette notice effect" that predicts that the suggestion effect will be executed (for example, "SP" in FIG. 56. (Selection), display of the step-up notice effect image 31p in "SU notice effect" (for example, display of "correct SU5 full rotation" in FIG. 56), display of "specific image 31e") can be executed. , The above-mentioned suggestion After the intellectual effect is executed (for example, (a) T1 to (a) T3 in FIG. 52), when the execution timing of the suggestion effect (for example, (a) T4 in FIG. 52) comes, the suggestion effect is executed (for example, For example, the pseudo-ream 2 variation is executed in (a) T4 to (a) T5 of FIG. 52), and before the predetermined timing, the first suggestion notification effect (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 notification period" or "pseudo-ream 2 notification period" is performed. The continuous 3 notification period ") and the first suggestion effect (for example," pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period "or" pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation period ") may be executed, and after the predetermined timing, the second The suggestion notification effect (for example, the display of the "specific image 31e") and the second suggestion effect (temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period") may be executed, and the first suggestion may be executed. When executing the notification effect, the advance notice effect can be executed (for example, in FIG. 52, in the "pseudo-ream 2 notification period" and the "pseudo-ream 3 notification period", the dialogue notice effect can be executed). When the second suggestion notification effect is executed, the advance notice effect is not executed (for example, in FIG. 52, the dialogue advance notice effect is not executed in the "background switching" for displaying the "specific image 31e").
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

A fourth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped. Identification information display control means (for example, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and predetermined commands (for example, each executed by the main CPU 110a). A command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process) is provided, and the effect control means is provided from the command transmission means. The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed to change the symbol. (For example, variation effect pattern 1 to variation effect pattern 33) can be executed, and the result of the determination is notified at a predetermined timing in the variation effect (for example, the timing of (a) T12 in FIG. 52). Then, in the fluctuation effect, a suggestion effect according to the result of the determination (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "total rotation fluctuation period", " The temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period") and the suggestion notification effect (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 notification period", "pseudo-ream 3 notification period", "pseudo-ream 3 notification period", which predicts that the suggestion effect will be executed. Selection of options in "Roulette notice effect" (for example, selection of "SP" in FIG. 56), display of step-up notice effect image 31p in "SU notice effect" (for example, display of "correct SU5 full rotation" in FIG. 56) , "Display of" specific image 31e "), and after the suggestion notification effect is executed (for example, (a) T1 to (a) T3 in FIG. 52), the execution timing of the suggestion effect (for example, For example, (a) of FIG. At T4), the suggestion effect is executed (for example, the pseudo-ream 2 variation is executed in (a) T4 to (a) T5 of FIG. 52), and the first suggestion notification effect (for example, before the predetermined timing) is executed. , "Pseudo-ream 2 notification period") and a first suggestion effect (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period"), and a first effect (for example, pseudo-ream 2 effect) and a second suggestion notification effect (for example). , "Pseudo-ream 3 notification period") and a second effect (for example, pseudo-ream 3 effect) consisting of a second suggestion effect (for example, "pseudo-ream 3 variation period") can be executed. After the timing, a third suggestion notification effect (for example, display of "specific image 31e") and a third suggestion effect (for example, temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period") are included. Three effects (for example, background switching effect and temporary stop display effect) can be executed, the ratio of executing the first effect and the third effect, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect. (For example, in FIG. 53, when the number of pseudo-reams of the variation effect patterns 3, 9, 14, and 15 is one, the pseudo-ream is executed as in the variation effect pattern 3, but the specific image 31e Is not displayed, but when the number of pseudo-reams of the variable effect patterns 10 to 12 and 16 to 18 is two, the specific image 31e is displayed in any of the variable effect patterns, so the first effect and the second effect are executed. The rate at which the third effect is executed is higher than the case where only the first effect is executed).
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

A fifth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped. Identification information display control means (for example, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and predetermined commands (for example, each executed by the main CPU 110a). A command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process) is provided, and the effect control means is provided from the command transmission means. The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed to change the symbol. (For example, variation effect pattern 1 to variation effect pattern 33) can be executed, and the result of the determination is notified at a predetermined timing in the variation effect (for example, the timing of (a) T12 in FIG. 52). Then, in the fluctuation effect, a suggestion effect according to the result of the determination (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "total rotation fluctuation period", " The temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period") and the suggestion notification effect (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 notification period", "pseudo-ream 3 notification period", "pseudo-ream 3 notification period", which predicts that the suggestion effect will be executed. Selection of options in "Roulette notice effect" (for example, selection of "SP" in FIG. 56), display of step-up notice effect image 31p in "SU notice effect" (for example, display of "correct SU5 full rotation" in FIG. 56) , "Display of" specific image 31e "), and after the suggestion notification effect is executed (for example, (a) T1 to (a) T3 in FIG. 52), the execution timing of the suggestion effect (for example, For example, (a) of FIG. At T4), the suggestion effect is executed (for example, the pseudo-ream 2 variation is executed in (a) T4 to (a) T5 of FIG. 52), and the first suggestion notification effect (for example, before the predetermined timing) is executed. , "Pseudo-ream 2 notification period", "Pseudo-ream 3 notification period") and the first suggestion effect (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation period"). , Pseudo continuous effect), and after the predetermined timing, a second suggestion notification effect (for example, display of "specific image 31e") and a second suggestion effect (for example, "temporary stop display period") It is possible to execute a second effect (for example, a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect) consisting of the effect symbol 38 in the above-mentioned effect (temporary stop display), and the result of the determination that the special game is not performed (for example, a jackpot determination). When the process step S311-1 is denied), the ratio of executing the first effect and the second effect and the result of the determination that the special game is to be performed (for example, step S311 of the jackpot determination process). When -1 is affirmative), the ratio of executing the first effect and the second effect is different (for example, the variation effect patterns 7 to 18 in FIG. 53 are the specific images 31e when they are lost). Is a variation effect pattern for displaying, and the variation effect pattern 30 is a variation effect pattern for displaying a specific image 31e when a big hit is made. Therefore, the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed in the case of a loss than in the case of a big hit).
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

A sixth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine including a main control means (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control board 120), and the main control When the starting condition is satisfied (for example, affirming step S310-2 of the special symbol memory determination process or affirming step S310-4 of the special symbol memory determination process), the means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a jackpot determination process), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped. Identification information display control means (for example, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and predetermined commands (for example, each executed by the main CPU 110a). A command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in the process) is provided, and the effect control means is provided from the command transmission means. The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the symbols corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the small effect symbol 38d) are changed to change the symbol. (For example, variation effect pattern 1 to variation effect pattern 33) can be executed, and the result of the determination is notified at a predetermined timing in the variation effect (for example, the timing of (a) T12 in FIG. 52). Then, in the fluctuation effect, a suggestion effect according to the result of the determination (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "total rotation fluctuation period", " The temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period") and the suggestion notification effect (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 notification period", "pseudo-ream 3 notification period", "pseudo-ream 3 notification period", which predicts that the suggestion effect will be executed. Selection of options in "Roulette notice effect" (for example, selection of "SP" in FIG. 56), display of step-up notice effect image 31p in "SU notice effect" (for example, display of "correct SU5 full rotation" in FIG. 56) , "Display of" specific image 31e "), and after the suggestion notification effect is executed (for example, (a) T1 to (a) T3 in FIG. 52), the execution timing of the suggestion effect (for example, For example, (a) of FIG. At T4), the suggestion effect is executed (for example, the pseudo-ream 2 variation is executed in (a) T4 to (a) T5 of FIG. 52), and the first suggestion notification effect (for example, before the predetermined timing) is executed. , "Pseudo-ream 2 notification period") and the first suggestion effect (for example, "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation period"), the first effect (for example, pseudo-ream 2 effect) can be executed, and from the predetermined timing After that, a second effect consisting of a second suggestion notification effect (for example, display of "specific image 31e") and a second suggestion effect (for example, temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period"). (For example, the background switching effect and the temporary stop display effect) can be executed, and the execution time of the first effect (for example, the time from the "pseudo-ream 2 notification period" to the "pseudo-ream 2 variation period") and the first effect. 2 The time different from the execution time of the effect (for example, the time from the display of the "specific image 31e" to the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period") (from the display of the "specific image 31e" to the "temporary stop"). The time until the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "display period" is shorter).
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines, but can also be used for rotating cylinder type gaming machines (so-called slot machines). Furthermore, it can also be used for pachinko and pachinko machines.

1 Pachinko machine 31 Image display device 32 Audio output device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
110b main ROM
110c main RAM
120 Production control board 120a Sub CPU
120b sub ROM
120c sub RAM
150 Display / voice control unit 155 Image control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine equipped with a main control means and an effect control means.
The main control means
When the starting condition is satisfied, a determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game that is advantageous to the player, and
When the determination is made, the identification information display control means for displaying the result of the determination by displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopping the display.
It is equipped with a command transmission means for transmitting a predetermined command.
The effect control means
It is possible to receive the predetermined command from the command transmitting means, and it is possible to receive the predetermined command.
It is possible to execute a variable effect of changing the symbol corresponding to the identification information and stopping the symbol.
In the variable effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect accompanied by a musical piece.
After the notification of not to perform the special game by executing the specific effect, it is possible display a specific image before stopping the display of the identification information is performed,
Among the specific effects, the number of songs differs between the first specific effect and the second specific effect that is different from the first specific effect.
When the specific image is displayed after executing the first specific effect, and when the specific image is displayed.
The second there is the case of displaying the specific image after executing the specific effect is, the period in which display is performed in the specific image is a gaming machine without the music.

Images